brakenhale school key stage 4
Post on 12-Jun-2022
3 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
High Expectations and Challenge
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options
Information 202022
Student Name
Pathway
Notes
THE BRAKENHALE SCHOOL
High Expectations and Challenge for All
Rectory Lane Bracknell
Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email officebrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
The Brakenhale School is part of the Greenshaw Learning Trust which is a charitable company limited by guarantee registered in England amp Wales company number 7633694 registered office Greenshaw Learning Trust Grennell Road Sutton Surrey SM1 3DY
January 2020
Dear ParentsCarers and Students
This booklet contains information on all Core subjects which students must study as well as Option subjects
available to your child
The opportunity for students to choose the subjects they study is a very important difference at Key Stage 4
hence the need for an Options Evening Students should give consideration to the subjects they are interested in as well as their ability in a particular subject In addition thought should be given to how different GCSE
or equivalent Level 2 courses fit in with future career or educational aspirations
At Brakenhale we value the partnership we have with parents and we are confident that we can provide the
necessary support and guidance to allow students to make informed choices at GCSE It is important to us to make the transition from Key Stage 3 to Key Stage 4 as successful and smooth as possible for the benefit of
our students
This guide has been produced to help you understand the kind of work students will be involved in during
the next two years as they prepare for their GCSE or equivalent Level 2 course examinations which will take place in MayJune 2022
GCSEs Equivalent Level 2 Courses and Vocational Courses
Almost all of the subjects offered at Key Stage 4 lead to a GCSE or equivalent Level 2 course qualification Many have an examination at the end of Year 11 and an element of coursework o controlled
assessment Information about coursework and controlled assessment in individual subjects is included in the subject pages further on in this brochure GCSE or equivalent Level 2 courses give students the
background they need to allow them to progress to further studies at The Brakenhale School or elsewhere
The Vocational courses we offer allow students to access the full range of GCSE grades (9-1) and consist of a
mix of theory and practice and are assessed by the teacher and through an external examination Students will complete a range of assignments case studies and practical activities and after each assessment will be
given a grade which will contribute to their final result
Yours faithfully
Mr R Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Contents
Introductory Letter
General Information
o Changes to GCSEs
o Vocational Qualifications
The Options process
o Information and Parentsrsquo Evening
o Careers Advice
o The Options Form
o Study Time
Options Advice for Students
Overview of the Key Stage 4 Curriculum
Core Subjects
o English Language and Literature
o Mathematics
o Science
o PE
Options Subjects
o GCSE Geography
o GCSE History
o GCSE Religious Studies
o GCSE Computer Science
o OCR Cambridge National in IT
o GCSE Business Studies
o GCSE Economics
o BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise (Business)
o GCSE Media Studies
o BTEC Tech Award in Creative Media Production
o GCSE French
o GCSE Spanish
o GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
o GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
o GCSE Photography
o GCSE Design amp Technology
o WJEC Hospitality amp Catering - Level 1 2
o BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
o GCSE Physical Education
o BTEC First in Sport
o GCSE Music
o BTEC First in Music
o GCSE Dance
o BTEC Tech Award in Performing Arts - Dance
o GCSE Drama
o BTEC Tech Award in Performing Arts ndash Drama
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Changes to GCSEs
What does it mean for you
All GCSEs at Key Stage 4 will be under the new system which is more demanding and grades are 9-1 9 being the
highest
What will be the key differences in these subjects
The new exams will be linear As such there will very few controlled assessment tasks and students will take an
external examination at the end of the course Students will be expected to study more content than in the current
GCSEs they will need to learn more off by heart as they go along and they will undertake an increased number of
extended writing tasks Some examples of the increased rigour are below
Mathematics
The new mathematics GCSE will be more substantial and challenging with greater emphasis on solving problems
that require ldquomultistep solutionsrdquo New topics being introduced include ratio and proportions Students will be
expected to learn key mathematical formulae by heart
English
Students of the new GCSE in English language will be expected to read ldquoa wide range of high quality challenging
texts from 19th 20th and 21st centuriesrdquo which they will respond to before using these skills to write creatively and
to persuade there will be increased focus on accurate use of spelling punctuation and grammar In contrast
English Literature will focus on whole texts to include Shakespeare Dickens Priestley as well as a variety of classic
and contemporary poetry
What will the key changes be in some other subjects
The content for other GCSE subjects is also intended to be more challenging and ambitious with more rigorous
assessment Key changes are as follows
bull Sciences ndash introduction of new areas of content and increased mathematical challenge
bull History ndash a wider range of historical periods and a much stronger emphasis on British history
bull Geography ndash greater depth in the study of the geography of the UK
bull Modern Languages - greater grammatical content including the requirement for most examination questions
to be asked in the target language
How will students be assessed
Ofqual have confirmed the following important changes to assessment of the new GCSEs
bull Introduction of a new grading scale using the numbers 9ndash1 with 9 being the top grade Where performance
is below the minimum required to be awarded a GCSE level students will be given a U
bull The use of two tiers of entry will only apply in subjects lsquowhere untiered papers will not allow students at the
lower end of the ability range to demonstrate their knowledge and skills or will not stretch the most ablersquo
Mathematics science and modern foreign languages will have a tiered entry with the foundation tier covering
grades 5ndash1 and the higher tier covering grades 9ndash4
bull All examinations will normally be taken in May and June of the final year
bull Spelling punctuation and grammar will continue to be assessed within English Literature Geography and
History as well as English Language
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Vocational Qualifications
BTEC Qualifications
When it comes to choosing option subjects in Year 9 there are lots of things to think about and with all the changes happening in education across the country it can quickly become confusing BTEC qualifications exist alongside
GCSE and A Level qualifications but sometimes are not given the lsquoair timersquo of their counterparts
The aim of this page is to hopefully answer some questions that people might have about the qualifications and
clear up any misconceptions that people may have BTEC and GCSE qualifications are equivalent to each other when it comes to measuring
studentrsquos performance Both qualifications are valuable in their own right and BTEC qualifications are
not worth any less than GCSEs Both will be accepted when it comes to measuring progress and applying
to sixth forms and colleges GCSE qualifications tend to suit students that perform better in examinations and controlled
assessments whereas BTEC qualifications are broken down into units and assignments
Generally speaking the GCSE courses are more theory and knowledge based which is why they are often referred to as lsquoacademicrsquo qualifications BTEC courses tend to focus more on skills and the practical
application of these skills which is why they are often referred to as lsquovocationalrsquo qualifications The GCSE
course is designed so that students sit exams and complete their coursework at the end of Year 11 but BTEC courses have units that need completing all the way through Year 10 and 11
GCSE courses are graded 9 - 1 and BTEC courses are graded from Pass to Distinction Star The
grading system for GCSE and BTEC are different and so it can be quite difficult to compare them in great detail but basically in GCSE qualifications students will get a numerical grade from 9 - 1 whereas BTEC
students will get a Pass Merit Distinction or Distinction Star The table below aims to compare GCSE grades and BTEC grades Unfortunately because of the way they
are calculated they donrsquot quite match up but it might help show which grades are equivalent with GCSE and BTEC For example a level 2 merit is worth somewhere between a C and a B This means that if a
student (and their teacher) was thinking a student might achieve a 4 (D) in GCSE but could get a merit at BTEC because of the way they learn then maybe BTEC might be better for them
If there are any questions about BTEC courses and their suitability as an option then please do be sure to get in
contact to ask The Heads of Departments that run BTECs can all help but if you would rather you can get in touch with Mr Corry (Deputy Headteacher) on rcorrybrakenhalecouk or Ms H Ioannidis (Vocational Qualifications
Coordinator) on hioannidisbrakenhalecouk
Thank you and good luck in choosing your options
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Tech Awards
We also offer Level 12 Tech Awards which are great for students motivated by a hands-on learning style and they
can study Tech Awards alongside their GCSEs
With these new Level 1 Level 2 courses students can
get a taste of what a specific sector is like
gain skills and confidence that will help them in the world today and prepare them for their futures
The assessment is both internal and external but the external assessment is mainly task based rather than an
examination They are graded and equivalent to the BTECs outlined on the previous page
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
The Option Process
This booklet is only one of the ways that we help students make their choice of subjects The preparation for
choosing options includes the following
The Option Information Evening ndash Thursday 16st January 2020
This evening is an opportunity for parents and students to gather information and ask questions about our options
system and the Key Stage 4 curriculum Students will have additional opportunities as detailed below to find out
about the option process in school
Year 9 Parentsrsquo Evening - Thursday 23rd (X side) or Tuesday 28th February 2020 (Y side)
The annual parents evening will be held on Thursday 23rd and Tuesday 28th February 2020 This is an opportunity
for parents to consult subject teachers about their childrsquos progress in each subject
Careers Advice
Year 9 students should now be aware of the implications of making particular choices If students have any specific
enquiries they should see their subject teachers Tutor Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher or Mr Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options Form 2020-22
The final day for submitting option choices online is Thursday 13th February 2020
Study time per 2 week timetable
Core 30 periods Options 20 periods
English 9 periods Option A 5 periods
Maths 8 periods Option B 5 periods
Science 9 periods Option C 5 periods
Physical Educational 4 periods Option D 5 periods
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Options Advice for Students
After nearly three years at the school you will have experienced many aspects of a varied and extensive curriculum
As a student in Year 9 you will now have to choose to continue your work in some subjects whilst giving up others
There is insufficient time to cover every subject to examination standard
You will have a personal timetable in Year 10 and 11 built up from the selections you have made from the options
programme
Before selecting your options it would be wise to read the following advice
1 Find out about the subjects by reading this booklet and asking the relevant members of staff
2 Remember
a) Do select subjects you enjoy studying
b) Do select subjects at which you are successful
c) Do ask for advice and find out everything about a subject as you will be studying it for two years
d) Do not be influenced by the choices made by your friends Their plans for the future along with
their interests and skills will not necessarily suit you Instead you must consider your own future
depending on whether you intend to go into training or further education in Sixth Form
e) Do not select a subject because you like a teacher You may have a different teacher
f) Each student is encouraged to select a broad and balanced curriculum as this will provide a
suitable platform from which further career decisions can be made A broad and balanced
curriculum would include a subject from the Arts Humanities Technology and a Language
3 If in doubthellipask
4 You will find it helpful to talk to your parents or carers subject teachers other relatives and friends form
tutor
5 If you are still unsure about your option choices contact should be made with your subject teachers your
Tutor Mr Spaul Head of Year 9 or Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher
6 Lastly we will make every effort to allocate your preferred option choices However there are occasions
when this will not be possible for example
a) too few students have selected a particular subject or
b) in the professional opinion of staff the student would not be suited to the subject selected or
c) it may not be possible to timetable all the combinations selected by students
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Student Name
Pathway
Notes
THE BRAKENHALE SCHOOL
High Expectations and Challenge for All
Rectory Lane Bracknell
Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email officebrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
The Brakenhale School is part of the Greenshaw Learning Trust which is a charitable company limited by guarantee registered in England amp Wales company number 7633694 registered office Greenshaw Learning Trust Grennell Road Sutton Surrey SM1 3DY
January 2020
Dear ParentsCarers and Students
This booklet contains information on all Core subjects which students must study as well as Option subjects
available to your child
The opportunity for students to choose the subjects they study is a very important difference at Key Stage 4
hence the need for an Options Evening Students should give consideration to the subjects they are interested in as well as their ability in a particular subject In addition thought should be given to how different GCSE
or equivalent Level 2 courses fit in with future career or educational aspirations
At Brakenhale we value the partnership we have with parents and we are confident that we can provide the
necessary support and guidance to allow students to make informed choices at GCSE It is important to us to make the transition from Key Stage 3 to Key Stage 4 as successful and smooth as possible for the benefit of
our students
This guide has been produced to help you understand the kind of work students will be involved in during
the next two years as they prepare for their GCSE or equivalent Level 2 course examinations which will take place in MayJune 2022
GCSEs Equivalent Level 2 Courses and Vocational Courses
Almost all of the subjects offered at Key Stage 4 lead to a GCSE or equivalent Level 2 course qualification Many have an examination at the end of Year 11 and an element of coursework o controlled
assessment Information about coursework and controlled assessment in individual subjects is included in the subject pages further on in this brochure GCSE or equivalent Level 2 courses give students the
background they need to allow them to progress to further studies at The Brakenhale School or elsewhere
The Vocational courses we offer allow students to access the full range of GCSE grades (9-1) and consist of a
mix of theory and practice and are assessed by the teacher and through an external examination Students will complete a range of assignments case studies and practical activities and after each assessment will be
given a grade which will contribute to their final result
Yours faithfully
Mr R Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Contents
Introductory Letter
General Information
o Changes to GCSEs
o Vocational Qualifications
The Options process
o Information and Parentsrsquo Evening
o Careers Advice
o The Options Form
o Study Time
Options Advice for Students
Overview of the Key Stage 4 Curriculum
Core Subjects
o English Language and Literature
o Mathematics
o Science
o PE
Options Subjects
o GCSE Geography
o GCSE History
o GCSE Religious Studies
o GCSE Computer Science
o OCR Cambridge National in IT
o GCSE Business Studies
o GCSE Economics
o BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise (Business)
o GCSE Media Studies
o BTEC Tech Award in Creative Media Production
o GCSE French
o GCSE Spanish
o GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
o GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
o GCSE Photography
o GCSE Design amp Technology
o WJEC Hospitality amp Catering - Level 1 2
o BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
o GCSE Physical Education
o BTEC First in Sport
o GCSE Music
o BTEC First in Music
o GCSE Dance
o BTEC Tech Award in Performing Arts - Dance
o GCSE Drama
o BTEC Tech Award in Performing Arts ndash Drama
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Changes to GCSEs
What does it mean for you
All GCSEs at Key Stage 4 will be under the new system which is more demanding and grades are 9-1 9 being the
highest
What will be the key differences in these subjects
The new exams will be linear As such there will very few controlled assessment tasks and students will take an
external examination at the end of the course Students will be expected to study more content than in the current
GCSEs they will need to learn more off by heart as they go along and they will undertake an increased number of
extended writing tasks Some examples of the increased rigour are below
Mathematics
The new mathematics GCSE will be more substantial and challenging with greater emphasis on solving problems
that require ldquomultistep solutionsrdquo New topics being introduced include ratio and proportions Students will be
expected to learn key mathematical formulae by heart
English
Students of the new GCSE in English language will be expected to read ldquoa wide range of high quality challenging
texts from 19th 20th and 21st centuriesrdquo which they will respond to before using these skills to write creatively and
to persuade there will be increased focus on accurate use of spelling punctuation and grammar In contrast
English Literature will focus on whole texts to include Shakespeare Dickens Priestley as well as a variety of classic
and contemporary poetry
What will the key changes be in some other subjects
The content for other GCSE subjects is also intended to be more challenging and ambitious with more rigorous
assessment Key changes are as follows
bull Sciences ndash introduction of new areas of content and increased mathematical challenge
bull History ndash a wider range of historical periods and a much stronger emphasis on British history
bull Geography ndash greater depth in the study of the geography of the UK
bull Modern Languages - greater grammatical content including the requirement for most examination questions
to be asked in the target language
How will students be assessed
Ofqual have confirmed the following important changes to assessment of the new GCSEs
bull Introduction of a new grading scale using the numbers 9ndash1 with 9 being the top grade Where performance
is below the minimum required to be awarded a GCSE level students will be given a U
bull The use of two tiers of entry will only apply in subjects lsquowhere untiered papers will not allow students at the
lower end of the ability range to demonstrate their knowledge and skills or will not stretch the most ablersquo
Mathematics science and modern foreign languages will have a tiered entry with the foundation tier covering
grades 5ndash1 and the higher tier covering grades 9ndash4
bull All examinations will normally be taken in May and June of the final year
bull Spelling punctuation and grammar will continue to be assessed within English Literature Geography and
History as well as English Language
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Vocational Qualifications
BTEC Qualifications
When it comes to choosing option subjects in Year 9 there are lots of things to think about and with all the changes happening in education across the country it can quickly become confusing BTEC qualifications exist alongside
GCSE and A Level qualifications but sometimes are not given the lsquoair timersquo of their counterparts
The aim of this page is to hopefully answer some questions that people might have about the qualifications and
clear up any misconceptions that people may have BTEC and GCSE qualifications are equivalent to each other when it comes to measuring
studentrsquos performance Both qualifications are valuable in their own right and BTEC qualifications are
not worth any less than GCSEs Both will be accepted when it comes to measuring progress and applying
to sixth forms and colleges GCSE qualifications tend to suit students that perform better in examinations and controlled
assessments whereas BTEC qualifications are broken down into units and assignments
Generally speaking the GCSE courses are more theory and knowledge based which is why they are often referred to as lsquoacademicrsquo qualifications BTEC courses tend to focus more on skills and the practical
application of these skills which is why they are often referred to as lsquovocationalrsquo qualifications The GCSE
course is designed so that students sit exams and complete their coursework at the end of Year 11 but BTEC courses have units that need completing all the way through Year 10 and 11
GCSE courses are graded 9 - 1 and BTEC courses are graded from Pass to Distinction Star The
grading system for GCSE and BTEC are different and so it can be quite difficult to compare them in great detail but basically in GCSE qualifications students will get a numerical grade from 9 - 1 whereas BTEC
students will get a Pass Merit Distinction or Distinction Star The table below aims to compare GCSE grades and BTEC grades Unfortunately because of the way they
are calculated they donrsquot quite match up but it might help show which grades are equivalent with GCSE and BTEC For example a level 2 merit is worth somewhere between a C and a B This means that if a
student (and their teacher) was thinking a student might achieve a 4 (D) in GCSE but could get a merit at BTEC because of the way they learn then maybe BTEC might be better for them
If there are any questions about BTEC courses and their suitability as an option then please do be sure to get in
contact to ask The Heads of Departments that run BTECs can all help but if you would rather you can get in touch with Mr Corry (Deputy Headteacher) on rcorrybrakenhalecouk or Ms H Ioannidis (Vocational Qualifications
Coordinator) on hioannidisbrakenhalecouk
Thank you and good luck in choosing your options
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Tech Awards
We also offer Level 12 Tech Awards which are great for students motivated by a hands-on learning style and they
can study Tech Awards alongside their GCSEs
With these new Level 1 Level 2 courses students can
get a taste of what a specific sector is like
gain skills and confidence that will help them in the world today and prepare them for their futures
The assessment is both internal and external but the external assessment is mainly task based rather than an
examination They are graded and equivalent to the BTECs outlined on the previous page
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
The Option Process
This booklet is only one of the ways that we help students make their choice of subjects The preparation for
choosing options includes the following
The Option Information Evening ndash Thursday 16st January 2020
This evening is an opportunity for parents and students to gather information and ask questions about our options
system and the Key Stage 4 curriculum Students will have additional opportunities as detailed below to find out
about the option process in school
Year 9 Parentsrsquo Evening - Thursday 23rd (X side) or Tuesday 28th February 2020 (Y side)
The annual parents evening will be held on Thursday 23rd and Tuesday 28th February 2020 This is an opportunity
for parents to consult subject teachers about their childrsquos progress in each subject
Careers Advice
Year 9 students should now be aware of the implications of making particular choices If students have any specific
enquiries they should see their subject teachers Tutor Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher or Mr Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options Form 2020-22
The final day for submitting option choices online is Thursday 13th February 2020
Study time per 2 week timetable
Core 30 periods Options 20 periods
English 9 periods Option A 5 periods
Maths 8 periods Option B 5 periods
Science 9 periods Option C 5 periods
Physical Educational 4 periods Option D 5 periods
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Options Advice for Students
After nearly three years at the school you will have experienced many aspects of a varied and extensive curriculum
As a student in Year 9 you will now have to choose to continue your work in some subjects whilst giving up others
There is insufficient time to cover every subject to examination standard
You will have a personal timetable in Year 10 and 11 built up from the selections you have made from the options
programme
Before selecting your options it would be wise to read the following advice
1 Find out about the subjects by reading this booklet and asking the relevant members of staff
2 Remember
a) Do select subjects you enjoy studying
b) Do select subjects at which you are successful
c) Do ask for advice and find out everything about a subject as you will be studying it for two years
d) Do not be influenced by the choices made by your friends Their plans for the future along with
their interests and skills will not necessarily suit you Instead you must consider your own future
depending on whether you intend to go into training or further education in Sixth Form
e) Do not select a subject because you like a teacher You may have a different teacher
f) Each student is encouraged to select a broad and balanced curriculum as this will provide a
suitable platform from which further career decisions can be made A broad and balanced
curriculum would include a subject from the Arts Humanities Technology and a Language
3 If in doubthellipask
4 You will find it helpful to talk to your parents or carers subject teachers other relatives and friends form
tutor
5 If you are still unsure about your option choices contact should be made with your subject teachers your
Tutor Mr Spaul Head of Year 9 or Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher
6 Lastly we will make every effort to allocate your preferred option choices However there are occasions
when this will not be possible for example
a) too few students have selected a particular subject or
b) in the professional opinion of staff the student would not be suited to the subject selected or
c) it may not be possible to timetable all the combinations selected by students
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
THE BRAKENHALE SCHOOL
High Expectations and Challenge for All
Rectory Lane Bracknell
Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email officebrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
The Brakenhale School is part of the Greenshaw Learning Trust which is a charitable company limited by guarantee registered in England amp Wales company number 7633694 registered office Greenshaw Learning Trust Grennell Road Sutton Surrey SM1 3DY
January 2020
Dear ParentsCarers and Students
This booklet contains information on all Core subjects which students must study as well as Option subjects
available to your child
The opportunity for students to choose the subjects they study is a very important difference at Key Stage 4
hence the need for an Options Evening Students should give consideration to the subjects they are interested in as well as their ability in a particular subject In addition thought should be given to how different GCSE
or equivalent Level 2 courses fit in with future career or educational aspirations
At Brakenhale we value the partnership we have with parents and we are confident that we can provide the
necessary support and guidance to allow students to make informed choices at GCSE It is important to us to make the transition from Key Stage 3 to Key Stage 4 as successful and smooth as possible for the benefit of
our students
This guide has been produced to help you understand the kind of work students will be involved in during
the next two years as they prepare for their GCSE or equivalent Level 2 course examinations which will take place in MayJune 2022
GCSEs Equivalent Level 2 Courses and Vocational Courses
Almost all of the subjects offered at Key Stage 4 lead to a GCSE or equivalent Level 2 course qualification Many have an examination at the end of Year 11 and an element of coursework o controlled
assessment Information about coursework and controlled assessment in individual subjects is included in the subject pages further on in this brochure GCSE or equivalent Level 2 courses give students the
background they need to allow them to progress to further studies at The Brakenhale School or elsewhere
The Vocational courses we offer allow students to access the full range of GCSE grades (9-1) and consist of a
mix of theory and practice and are assessed by the teacher and through an external examination Students will complete a range of assignments case studies and practical activities and after each assessment will be
given a grade which will contribute to their final result
Yours faithfully
Mr R Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Contents
Introductory Letter
General Information
o Changes to GCSEs
o Vocational Qualifications
The Options process
o Information and Parentsrsquo Evening
o Careers Advice
o The Options Form
o Study Time
Options Advice for Students
Overview of the Key Stage 4 Curriculum
Core Subjects
o English Language and Literature
o Mathematics
o Science
o PE
Options Subjects
o GCSE Geography
o GCSE History
o GCSE Religious Studies
o GCSE Computer Science
o OCR Cambridge National in IT
o GCSE Business Studies
o GCSE Economics
o BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise (Business)
o GCSE Media Studies
o BTEC Tech Award in Creative Media Production
o GCSE French
o GCSE Spanish
o GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
o GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
o GCSE Photography
o GCSE Design amp Technology
o WJEC Hospitality amp Catering - Level 1 2
o BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
o GCSE Physical Education
o BTEC First in Sport
o GCSE Music
o BTEC First in Music
o GCSE Dance
o BTEC Tech Award in Performing Arts - Dance
o GCSE Drama
o BTEC Tech Award in Performing Arts ndash Drama
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Changes to GCSEs
What does it mean for you
All GCSEs at Key Stage 4 will be under the new system which is more demanding and grades are 9-1 9 being the
highest
What will be the key differences in these subjects
The new exams will be linear As such there will very few controlled assessment tasks and students will take an
external examination at the end of the course Students will be expected to study more content than in the current
GCSEs they will need to learn more off by heart as they go along and they will undertake an increased number of
extended writing tasks Some examples of the increased rigour are below
Mathematics
The new mathematics GCSE will be more substantial and challenging with greater emphasis on solving problems
that require ldquomultistep solutionsrdquo New topics being introduced include ratio and proportions Students will be
expected to learn key mathematical formulae by heart
English
Students of the new GCSE in English language will be expected to read ldquoa wide range of high quality challenging
texts from 19th 20th and 21st centuriesrdquo which they will respond to before using these skills to write creatively and
to persuade there will be increased focus on accurate use of spelling punctuation and grammar In contrast
English Literature will focus on whole texts to include Shakespeare Dickens Priestley as well as a variety of classic
and contemporary poetry
What will the key changes be in some other subjects
The content for other GCSE subjects is also intended to be more challenging and ambitious with more rigorous
assessment Key changes are as follows
bull Sciences ndash introduction of new areas of content and increased mathematical challenge
bull History ndash a wider range of historical periods and a much stronger emphasis on British history
bull Geography ndash greater depth in the study of the geography of the UK
bull Modern Languages - greater grammatical content including the requirement for most examination questions
to be asked in the target language
How will students be assessed
Ofqual have confirmed the following important changes to assessment of the new GCSEs
bull Introduction of a new grading scale using the numbers 9ndash1 with 9 being the top grade Where performance
is below the minimum required to be awarded a GCSE level students will be given a U
bull The use of two tiers of entry will only apply in subjects lsquowhere untiered papers will not allow students at the
lower end of the ability range to demonstrate their knowledge and skills or will not stretch the most ablersquo
Mathematics science and modern foreign languages will have a tiered entry with the foundation tier covering
grades 5ndash1 and the higher tier covering grades 9ndash4
bull All examinations will normally be taken in May and June of the final year
bull Spelling punctuation and grammar will continue to be assessed within English Literature Geography and
History as well as English Language
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Vocational Qualifications
BTEC Qualifications
When it comes to choosing option subjects in Year 9 there are lots of things to think about and with all the changes happening in education across the country it can quickly become confusing BTEC qualifications exist alongside
GCSE and A Level qualifications but sometimes are not given the lsquoair timersquo of their counterparts
The aim of this page is to hopefully answer some questions that people might have about the qualifications and
clear up any misconceptions that people may have BTEC and GCSE qualifications are equivalent to each other when it comes to measuring
studentrsquos performance Both qualifications are valuable in their own right and BTEC qualifications are
not worth any less than GCSEs Both will be accepted when it comes to measuring progress and applying
to sixth forms and colleges GCSE qualifications tend to suit students that perform better in examinations and controlled
assessments whereas BTEC qualifications are broken down into units and assignments
Generally speaking the GCSE courses are more theory and knowledge based which is why they are often referred to as lsquoacademicrsquo qualifications BTEC courses tend to focus more on skills and the practical
application of these skills which is why they are often referred to as lsquovocationalrsquo qualifications The GCSE
course is designed so that students sit exams and complete their coursework at the end of Year 11 but BTEC courses have units that need completing all the way through Year 10 and 11
GCSE courses are graded 9 - 1 and BTEC courses are graded from Pass to Distinction Star The
grading system for GCSE and BTEC are different and so it can be quite difficult to compare them in great detail but basically in GCSE qualifications students will get a numerical grade from 9 - 1 whereas BTEC
students will get a Pass Merit Distinction or Distinction Star The table below aims to compare GCSE grades and BTEC grades Unfortunately because of the way they
are calculated they donrsquot quite match up but it might help show which grades are equivalent with GCSE and BTEC For example a level 2 merit is worth somewhere between a C and a B This means that if a
student (and their teacher) was thinking a student might achieve a 4 (D) in GCSE but could get a merit at BTEC because of the way they learn then maybe BTEC might be better for them
If there are any questions about BTEC courses and their suitability as an option then please do be sure to get in
contact to ask The Heads of Departments that run BTECs can all help but if you would rather you can get in touch with Mr Corry (Deputy Headteacher) on rcorrybrakenhalecouk or Ms H Ioannidis (Vocational Qualifications
Coordinator) on hioannidisbrakenhalecouk
Thank you and good luck in choosing your options
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Tech Awards
We also offer Level 12 Tech Awards which are great for students motivated by a hands-on learning style and they
can study Tech Awards alongside their GCSEs
With these new Level 1 Level 2 courses students can
get a taste of what a specific sector is like
gain skills and confidence that will help them in the world today and prepare them for their futures
The assessment is both internal and external but the external assessment is mainly task based rather than an
examination They are graded and equivalent to the BTECs outlined on the previous page
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
The Option Process
This booklet is only one of the ways that we help students make their choice of subjects The preparation for
choosing options includes the following
The Option Information Evening ndash Thursday 16st January 2020
This evening is an opportunity for parents and students to gather information and ask questions about our options
system and the Key Stage 4 curriculum Students will have additional opportunities as detailed below to find out
about the option process in school
Year 9 Parentsrsquo Evening - Thursday 23rd (X side) or Tuesday 28th February 2020 (Y side)
The annual parents evening will be held on Thursday 23rd and Tuesday 28th February 2020 This is an opportunity
for parents to consult subject teachers about their childrsquos progress in each subject
Careers Advice
Year 9 students should now be aware of the implications of making particular choices If students have any specific
enquiries they should see their subject teachers Tutor Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher or Mr Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options Form 2020-22
The final day for submitting option choices online is Thursday 13th February 2020
Study time per 2 week timetable
Core 30 periods Options 20 periods
English 9 periods Option A 5 periods
Maths 8 periods Option B 5 periods
Science 9 periods Option C 5 periods
Physical Educational 4 periods Option D 5 periods
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Options Advice for Students
After nearly three years at the school you will have experienced many aspects of a varied and extensive curriculum
As a student in Year 9 you will now have to choose to continue your work in some subjects whilst giving up others
There is insufficient time to cover every subject to examination standard
You will have a personal timetable in Year 10 and 11 built up from the selections you have made from the options
programme
Before selecting your options it would be wise to read the following advice
1 Find out about the subjects by reading this booklet and asking the relevant members of staff
2 Remember
a) Do select subjects you enjoy studying
b) Do select subjects at which you are successful
c) Do ask for advice and find out everything about a subject as you will be studying it for two years
d) Do not be influenced by the choices made by your friends Their plans for the future along with
their interests and skills will not necessarily suit you Instead you must consider your own future
depending on whether you intend to go into training or further education in Sixth Form
e) Do not select a subject because you like a teacher You may have a different teacher
f) Each student is encouraged to select a broad and balanced curriculum as this will provide a
suitable platform from which further career decisions can be made A broad and balanced
curriculum would include a subject from the Arts Humanities Technology and a Language
3 If in doubthellipask
4 You will find it helpful to talk to your parents or carers subject teachers other relatives and friends form
tutor
5 If you are still unsure about your option choices contact should be made with your subject teachers your
Tutor Mr Spaul Head of Year 9 or Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher
6 Lastly we will make every effort to allocate your preferred option choices However there are occasions
when this will not be possible for example
a) too few students have selected a particular subject or
b) in the professional opinion of staff the student would not be suited to the subject selected or
c) it may not be possible to timetable all the combinations selected by students
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Contents
Introductory Letter
General Information
o Changes to GCSEs
o Vocational Qualifications
The Options process
o Information and Parentsrsquo Evening
o Careers Advice
o The Options Form
o Study Time
Options Advice for Students
Overview of the Key Stage 4 Curriculum
Core Subjects
o English Language and Literature
o Mathematics
o Science
o PE
Options Subjects
o GCSE Geography
o GCSE History
o GCSE Religious Studies
o GCSE Computer Science
o OCR Cambridge National in IT
o GCSE Business Studies
o GCSE Economics
o BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise (Business)
o GCSE Media Studies
o BTEC Tech Award in Creative Media Production
o GCSE French
o GCSE Spanish
o GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
o GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
o GCSE Photography
o GCSE Design amp Technology
o WJEC Hospitality amp Catering - Level 1 2
o BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
o GCSE Physical Education
o BTEC First in Sport
o GCSE Music
o BTEC First in Music
o GCSE Dance
o BTEC Tech Award in Performing Arts - Dance
o GCSE Drama
o BTEC Tech Award in Performing Arts ndash Drama
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Changes to GCSEs
What does it mean for you
All GCSEs at Key Stage 4 will be under the new system which is more demanding and grades are 9-1 9 being the
highest
What will be the key differences in these subjects
The new exams will be linear As such there will very few controlled assessment tasks and students will take an
external examination at the end of the course Students will be expected to study more content than in the current
GCSEs they will need to learn more off by heart as they go along and they will undertake an increased number of
extended writing tasks Some examples of the increased rigour are below
Mathematics
The new mathematics GCSE will be more substantial and challenging with greater emphasis on solving problems
that require ldquomultistep solutionsrdquo New topics being introduced include ratio and proportions Students will be
expected to learn key mathematical formulae by heart
English
Students of the new GCSE in English language will be expected to read ldquoa wide range of high quality challenging
texts from 19th 20th and 21st centuriesrdquo which they will respond to before using these skills to write creatively and
to persuade there will be increased focus on accurate use of spelling punctuation and grammar In contrast
English Literature will focus on whole texts to include Shakespeare Dickens Priestley as well as a variety of classic
and contemporary poetry
What will the key changes be in some other subjects
The content for other GCSE subjects is also intended to be more challenging and ambitious with more rigorous
assessment Key changes are as follows
bull Sciences ndash introduction of new areas of content and increased mathematical challenge
bull History ndash a wider range of historical periods and a much stronger emphasis on British history
bull Geography ndash greater depth in the study of the geography of the UK
bull Modern Languages - greater grammatical content including the requirement for most examination questions
to be asked in the target language
How will students be assessed
Ofqual have confirmed the following important changes to assessment of the new GCSEs
bull Introduction of a new grading scale using the numbers 9ndash1 with 9 being the top grade Where performance
is below the minimum required to be awarded a GCSE level students will be given a U
bull The use of two tiers of entry will only apply in subjects lsquowhere untiered papers will not allow students at the
lower end of the ability range to demonstrate their knowledge and skills or will not stretch the most ablersquo
Mathematics science and modern foreign languages will have a tiered entry with the foundation tier covering
grades 5ndash1 and the higher tier covering grades 9ndash4
bull All examinations will normally be taken in May and June of the final year
bull Spelling punctuation and grammar will continue to be assessed within English Literature Geography and
History as well as English Language
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Vocational Qualifications
BTEC Qualifications
When it comes to choosing option subjects in Year 9 there are lots of things to think about and with all the changes happening in education across the country it can quickly become confusing BTEC qualifications exist alongside
GCSE and A Level qualifications but sometimes are not given the lsquoair timersquo of their counterparts
The aim of this page is to hopefully answer some questions that people might have about the qualifications and
clear up any misconceptions that people may have BTEC and GCSE qualifications are equivalent to each other when it comes to measuring
studentrsquos performance Both qualifications are valuable in their own right and BTEC qualifications are
not worth any less than GCSEs Both will be accepted when it comes to measuring progress and applying
to sixth forms and colleges GCSE qualifications tend to suit students that perform better in examinations and controlled
assessments whereas BTEC qualifications are broken down into units and assignments
Generally speaking the GCSE courses are more theory and knowledge based which is why they are often referred to as lsquoacademicrsquo qualifications BTEC courses tend to focus more on skills and the practical
application of these skills which is why they are often referred to as lsquovocationalrsquo qualifications The GCSE
course is designed so that students sit exams and complete their coursework at the end of Year 11 but BTEC courses have units that need completing all the way through Year 10 and 11
GCSE courses are graded 9 - 1 and BTEC courses are graded from Pass to Distinction Star The
grading system for GCSE and BTEC are different and so it can be quite difficult to compare them in great detail but basically in GCSE qualifications students will get a numerical grade from 9 - 1 whereas BTEC
students will get a Pass Merit Distinction or Distinction Star The table below aims to compare GCSE grades and BTEC grades Unfortunately because of the way they
are calculated they donrsquot quite match up but it might help show which grades are equivalent with GCSE and BTEC For example a level 2 merit is worth somewhere between a C and a B This means that if a
student (and their teacher) was thinking a student might achieve a 4 (D) in GCSE but could get a merit at BTEC because of the way they learn then maybe BTEC might be better for them
If there are any questions about BTEC courses and their suitability as an option then please do be sure to get in
contact to ask The Heads of Departments that run BTECs can all help but if you would rather you can get in touch with Mr Corry (Deputy Headteacher) on rcorrybrakenhalecouk or Ms H Ioannidis (Vocational Qualifications
Coordinator) on hioannidisbrakenhalecouk
Thank you and good luck in choosing your options
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Tech Awards
We also offer Level 12 Tech Awards which are great for students motivated by a hands-on learning style and they
can study Tech Awards alongside their GCSEs
With these new Level 1 Level 2 courses students can
get a taste of what a specific sector is like
gain skills and confidence that will help them in the world today and prepare them for their futures
The assessment is both internal and external but the external assessment is mainly task based rather than an
examination They are graded and equivalent to the BTECs outlined on the previous page
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
The Option Process
This booklet is only one of the ways that we help students make their choice of subjects The preparation for
choosing options includes the following
The Option Information Evening ndash Thursday 16st January 2020
This evening is an opportunity for parents and students to gather information and ask questions about our options
system and the Key Stage 4 curriculum Students will have additional opportunities as detailed below to find out
about the option process in school
Year 9 Parentsrsquo Evening - Thursday 23rd (X side) or Tuesday 28th February 2020 (Y side)
The annual parents evening will be held on Thursday 23rd and Tuesday 28th February 2020 This is an opportunity
for parents to consult subject teachers about their childrsquos progress in each subject
Careers Advice
Year 9 students should now be aware of the implications of making particular choices If students have any specific
enquiries they should see their subject teachers Tutor Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher or Mr Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options Form 2020-22
The final day for submitting option choices online is Thursday 13th February 2020
Study time per 2 week timetable
Core 30 periods Options 20 periods
English 9 periods Option A 5 periods
Maths 8 periods Option B 5 periods
Science 9 periods Option C 5 periods
Physical Educational 4 periods Option D 5 periods
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Options Advice for Students
After nearly three years at the school you will have experienced many aspects of a varied and extensive curriculum
As a student in Year 9 you will now have to choose to continue your work in some subjects whilst giving up others
There is insufficient time to cover every subject to examination standard
You will have a personal timetable in Year 10 and 11 built up from the selections you have made from the options
programme
Before selecting your options it would be wise to read the following advice
1 Find out about the subjects by reading this booklet and asking the relevant members of staff
2 Remember
a) Do select subjects you enjoy studying
b) Do select subjects at which you are successful
c) Do ask for advice and find out everything about a subject as you will be studying it for two years
d) Do not be influenced by the choices made by your friends Their plans for the future along with
their interests and skills will not necessarily suit you Instead you must consider your own future
depending on whether you intend to go into training or further education in Sixth Form
e) Do not select a subject because you like a teacher You may have a different teacher
f) Each student is encouraged to select a broad and balanced curriculum as this will provide a
suitable platform from which further career decisions can be made A broad and balanced
curriculum would include a subject from the Arts Humanities Technology and a Language
3 If in doubthellipask
4 You will find it helpful to talk to your parents or carers subject teachers other relatives and friends form
tutor
5 If you are still unsure about your option choices contact should be made with your subject teachers your
Tutor Mr Spaul Head of Year 9 or Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher
6 Lastly we will make every effort to allocate your preferred option choices However there are occasions
when this will not be possible for example
a) too few students have selected a particular subject or
b) in the professional opinion of staff the student would not be suited to the subject selected or
c) it may not be possible to timetable all the combinations selected by students
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Changes to GCSEs
What does it mean for you
All GCSEs at Key Stage 4 will be under the new system which is more demanding and grades are 9-1 9 being the
highest
What will be the key differences in these subjects
The new exams will be linear As such there will very few controlled assessment tasks and students will take an
external examination at the end of the course Students will be expected to study more content than in the current
GCSEs they will need to learn more off by heart as they go along and they will undertake an increased number of
extended writing tasks Some examples of the increased rigour are below
Mathematics
The new mathematics GCSE will be more substantial and challenging with greater emphasis on solving problems
that require ldquomultistep solutionsrdquo New topics being introduced include ratio and proportions Students will be
expected to learn key mathematical formulae by heart
English
Students of the new GCSE in English language will be expected to read ldquoa wide range of high quality challenging
texts from 19th 20th and 21st centuriesrdquo which they will respond to before using these skills to write creatively and
to persuade there will be increased focus on accurate use of spelling punctuation and grammar In contrast
English Literature will focus on whole texts to include Shakespeare Dickens Priestley as well as a variety of classic
and contemporary poetry
What will the key changes be in some other subjects
The content for other GCSE subjects is also intended to be more challenging and ambitious with more rigorous
assessment Key changes are as follows
bull Sciences ndash introduction of new areas of content and increased mathematical challenge
bull History ndash a wider range of historical periods and a much stronger emphasis on British history
bull Geography ndash greater depth in the study of the geography of the UK
bull Modern Languages - greater grammatical content including the requirement for most examination questions
to be asked in the target language
How will students be assessed
Ofqual have confirmed the following important changes to assessment of the new GCSEs
bull Introduction of a new grading scale using the numbers 9ndash1 with 9 being the top grade Where performance
is below the minimum required to be awarded a GCSE level students will be given a U
bull The use of two tiers of entry will only apply in subjects lsquowhere untiered papers will not allow students at the
lower end of the ability range to demonstrate their knowledge and skills or will not stretch the most ablersquo
Mathematics science and modern foreign languages will have a tiered entry with the foundation tier covering
grades 5ndash1 and the higher tier covering grades 9ndash4
bull All examinations will normally be taken in May and June of the final year
bull Spelling punctuation and grammar will continue to be assessed within English Literature Geography and
History as well as English Language
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Vocational Qualifications
BTEC Qualifications
When it comes to choosing option subjects in Year 9 there are lots of things to think about and with all the changes happening in education across the country it can quickly become confusing BTEC qualifications exist alongside
GCSE and A Level qualifications but sometimes are not given the lsquoair timersquo of their counterparts
The aim of this page is to hopefully answer some questions that people might have about the qualifications and
clear up any misconceptions that people may have BTEC and GCSE qualifications are equivalent to each other when it comes to measuring
studentrsquos performance Both qualifications are valuable in their own right and BTEC qualifications are
not worth any less than GCSEs Both will be accepted when it comes to measuring progress and applying
to sixth forms and colleges GCSE qualifications tend to suit students that perform better in examinations and controlled
assessments whereas BTEC qualifications are broken down into units and assignments
Generally speaking the GCSE courses are more theory and knowledge based which is why they are often referred to as lsquoacademicrsquo qualifications BTEC courses tend to focus more on skills and the practical
application of these skills which is why they are often referred to as lsquovocationalrsquo qualifications The GCSE
course is designed so that students sit exams and complete their coursework at the end of Year 11 but BTEC courses have units that need completing all the way through Year 10 and 11
GCSE courses are graded 9 - 1 and BTEC courses are graded from Pass to Distinction Star The
grading system for GCSE and BTEC are different and so it can be quite difficult to compare them in great detail but basically in GCSE qualifications students will get a numerical grade from 9 - 1 whereas BTEC
students will get a Pass Merit Distinction or Distinction Star The table below aims to compare GCSE grades and BTEC grades Unfortunately because of the way they
are calculated they donrsquot quite match up but it might help show which grades are equivalent with GCSE and BTEC For example a level 2 merit is worth somewhere between a C and a B This means that if a
student (and their teacher) was thinking a student might achieve a 4 (D) in GCSE but could get a merit at BTEC because of the way they learn then maybe BTEC might be better for them
If there are any questions about BTEC courses and their suitability as an option then please do be sure to get in
contact to ask The Heads of Departments that run BTECs can all help but if you would rather you can get in touch with Mr Corry (Deputy Headteacher) on rcorrybrakenhalecouk or Ms H Ioannidis (Vocational Qualifications
Coordinator) on hioannidisbrakenhalecouk
Thank you and good luck in choosing your options
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Tech Awards
We also offer Level 12 Tech Awards which are great for students motivated by a hands-on learning style and they
can study Tech Awards alongside their GCSEs
With these new Level 1 Level 2 courses students can
get a taste of what a specific sector is like
gain skills and confidence that will help them in the world today and prepare them for their futures
The assessment is both internal and external but the external assessment is mainly task based rather than an
examination They are graded and equivalent to the BTECs outlined on the previous page
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
The Option Process
This booklet is only one of the ways that we help students make their choice of subjects The preparation for
choosing options includes the following
The Option Information Evening ndash Thursday 16st January 2020
This evening is an opportunity for parents and students to gather information and ask questions about our options
system and the Key Stage 4 curriculum Students will have additional opportunities as detailed below to find out
about the option process in school
Year 9 Parentsrsquo Evening - Thursday 23rd (X side) or Tuesday 28th February 2020 (Y side)
The annual parents evening will be held on Thursday 23rd and Tuesday 28th February 2020 This is an opportunity
for parents to consult subject teachers about their childrsquos progress in each subject
Careers Advice
Year 9 students should now be aware of the implications of making particular choices If students have any specific
enquiries they should see their subject teachers Tutor Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher or Mr Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options Form 2020-22
The final day for submitting option choices online is Thursday 13th February 2020
Study time per 2 week timetable
Core 30 periods Options 20 periods
English 9 periods Option A 5 periods
Maths 8 periods Option B 5 periods
Science 9 periods Option C 5 periods
Physical Educational 4 periods Option D 5 periods
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Options Advice for Students
After nearly three years at the school you will have experienced many aspects of a varied and extensive curriculum
As a student in Year 9 you will now have to choose to continue your work in some subjects whilst giving up others
There is insufficient time to cover every subject to examination standard
You will have a personal timetable in Year 10 and 11 built up from the selections you have made from the options
programme
Before selecting your options it would be wise to read the following advice
1 Find out about the subjects by reading this booklet and asking the relevant members of staff
2 Remember
a) Do select subjects you enjoy studying
b) Do select subjects at which you are successful
c) Do ask for advice and find out everything about a subject as you will be studying it for two years
d) Do not be influenced by the choices made by your friends Their plans for the future along with
their interests and skills will not necessarily suit you Instead you must consider your own future
depending on whether you intend to go into training or further education in Sixth Form
e) Do not select a subject because you like a teacher You may have a different teacher
f) Each student is encouraged to select a broad and balanced curriculum as this will provide a
suitable platform from which further career decisions can be made A broad and balanced
curriculum would include a subject from the Arts Humanities Technology and a Language
3 If in doubthellipask
4 You will find it helpful to talk to your parents or carers subject teachers other relatives and friends form
tutor
5 If you are still unsure about your option choices contact should be made with your subject teachers your
Tutor Mr Spaul Head of Year 9 or Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher
6 Lastly we will make every effort to allocate your preferred option choices However there are occasions
when this will not be possible for example
a) too few students have selected a particular subject or
b) in the professional opinion of staff the student would not be suited to the subject selected or
c) it may not be possible to timetable all the combinations selected by students
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
General Information Vocational Qualifications
BTEC Qualifications
When it comes to choosing option subjects in Year 9 there are lots of things to think about and with all the changes happening in education across the country it can quickly become confusing BTEC qualifications exist alongside
GCSE and A Level qualifications but sometimes are not given the lsquoair timersquo of their counterparts
The aim of this page is to hopefully answer some questions that people might have about the qualifications and
clear up any misconceptions that people may have BTEC and GCSE qualifications are equivalent to each other when it comes to measuring
studentrsquos performance Both qualifications are valuable in their own right and BTEC qualifications are
not worth any less than GCSEs Both will be accepted when it comes to measuring progress and applying
to sixth forms and colleges GCSE qualifications tend to suit students that perform better in examinations and controlled
assessments whereas BTEC qualifications are broken down into units and assignments
Generally speaking the GCSE courses are more theory and knowledge based which is why they are often referred to as lsquoacademicrsquo qualifications BTEC courses tend to focus more on skills and the practical
application of these skills which is why they are often referred to as lsquovocationalrsquo qualifications The GCSE
course is designed so that students sit exams and complete their coursework at the end of Year 11 but BTEC courses have units that need completing all the way through Year 10 and 11
GCSE courses are graded 9 - 1 and BTEC courses are graded from Pass to Distinction Star The
grading system for GCSE and BTEC are different and so it can be quite difficult to compare them in great detail but basically in GCSE qualifications students will get a numerical grade from 9 - 1 whereas BTEC
students will get a Pass Merit Distinction or Distinction Star The table below aims to compare GCSE grades and BTEC grades Unfortunately because of the way they
are calculated they donrsquot quite match up but it might help show which grades are equivalent with GCSE and BTEC For example a level 2 merit is worth somewhere between a C and a B This means that if a
student (and their teacher) was thinking a student might achieve a 4 (D) in GCSE but could get a merit at BTEC because of the way they learn then maybe BTEC might be better for them
If there are any questions about BTEC courses and their suitability as an option then please do be sure to get in
contact to ask The Heads of Departments that run BTECs can all help but if you would rather you can get in touch with Mr Corry (Deputy Headteacher) on rcorrybrakenhalecouk or Ms H Ioannidis (Vocational Qualifications
Coordinator) on hioannidisbrakenhalecouk
Thank you and good luck in choosing your options
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Tech Awards
We also offer Level 12 Tech Awards which are great for students motivated by a hands-on learning style and they
can study Tech Awards alongside their GCSEs
With these new Level 1 Level 2 courses students can
get a taste of what a specific sector is like
gain skills and confidence that will help them in the world today and prepare them for their futures
The assessment is both internal and external but the external assessment is mainly task based rather than an
examination They are graded and equivalent to the BTECs outlined on the previous page
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
The Option Process
This booklet is only one of the ways that we help students make their choice of subjects The preparation for
choosing options includes the following
The Option Information Evening ndash Thursday 16st January 2020
This evening is an opportunity for parents and students to gather information and ask questions about our options
system and the Key Stage 4 curriculum Students will have additional opportunities as detailed below to find out
about the option process in school
Year 9 Parentsrsquo Evening - Thursday 23rd (X side) or Tuesday 28th February 2020 (Y side)
The annual parents evening will be held on Thursday 23rd and Tuesday 28th February 2020 This is an opportunity
for parents to consult subject teachers about their childrsquos progress in each subject
Careers Advice
Year 9 students should now be aware of the implications of making particular choices If students have any specific
enquiries they should see their subject teachers Tutor Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher or Mr Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options Form 2020-22
The final day for submitting option choices online is Thursday 13th February 2020
Study time per 2 week timetable
Core 30 periods Options 20 periods
English 9 periods Option A 5 periods
Maths 8 periods Option B 5 periods
Science 9 periods Option C 5 periods
Physical Educational 4 periods Option D 5 periods
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Options Advice for Students
After nearly three years at the school you will have experienced many aspects of a varied and extensive curriculum
As a student in Year 9 you will now have to choose to continue your work in some subjects whilst giving up others
There is insufficient time to cover every subject to examination standard
You will have a personal timetable in Year 10 and 11 built up from the selections you have made from the options
programme
Before selecting your options it would be wise to read the following advice
1 Find out about the subjects by reading this booklet and asking the relevant members of staff
2 Remember
a) Do select subjects you enjoy studying
b) Do select subjects at which you are successful
c) Do ask for advice and find out everything about a subject as you will be studying it for two years
d) Do not be influenced by the choices made by your friends Their plans for the future along with
their interests and skills will not necessarily suit you Instead you must consider your own future
depending on whether you intend to go into training or further education in Sixth Form
e) Do not select a subject because you like a teacher You may have a different teacher
f) Each student is encouraged to select a broad and balanced curriculum as this will provide a
suitable platform from which further career decisions can be made A broad and balanced
curriculum would include a subject from the Arts Humanities Technology and a Language
3 If in doubthellipask
4 You will find it helpful to talk to your parents or carers subject teachers other relatives and friends form
tutor
5 If you are still unsure about your option choices contact should be made with your subject teachers your
Tutor Mr Spaul Head of Year 9 or Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher
6 Lastly we will make every effort to allocate your preferred option choices However there are occasions
when this will not be possible for example
a) too few students have selected a particular subject or
b) in the professional opinion of staff the student would not be suited to the subject selected or
c) it may not be possible to timetable all the combinations selected by students
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Tech Awards
We also offer Level 12 Tech Awards which are great for students motivated by a hands-on learning style and they
can study Tech Awards alongside their GCSEs
With these new Level 1 Level 2 courses students can
get a taste of what a specific sector is like
gain skills and confidence that will help them in the world today and prepare them for their futures
The assessment is both internal and external but the external assessment is mainly task based rather than an
examination They are graded and equivalent to the BTECs outlined on the previous page
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
The Option Process
This booklet is only one of the ways that we help students make their choice of subjects The preparation for
choosing options includes the following
The Option Information Evening ndash Thursday 16st January 2020
This evening is an opportunity for parents and students to gather information and ask questions about our options
system and the Key Stage 4 curriculum Students will have additional opportunities as detailed below to find out
about the option process in school
Year 9 Parentsrsquo Evening - Thursday 23rd (X side) or Tuesday 28th February 2020 (Y side)
The annual parents evening will be held on Thursday 23rd and Tuesday 28th February 2020 This is an opportunity
for parents to consult subject teachers about their childrsquos progress in each subject
Careers Advice
Year 9 students should now be aware of the implications of making particular choices If students have any specific
enquiries they should see their subject teachers Tutor Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher or Mr Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options Form 2020-22
The final day for submitting option choices online is Thursday 13th February 2020
Study time per 2 week timetable
Core 30 periods Options 20 periods
English 9 periods Option A 5 periods
Maths 8 periods Option B 5 periods
Science 9 periods Option C 5 periods
Physical Educational 4 periods Option D 5 periods
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Options Advice for Students
After nearly three years at the school you will have experienced many aspects of a varied and extensive curriculum
As a student in Year 9 you will now have to choose to continue your work in some subjects whilst giving up others
There is insufficient time to cover every subject to examination standard
You will have a personal timetable in Year 10 and 11 built up from the selections you have made from the options
programme
Before selecting your options it would be wise to read the following advice
1 Find out about the subjects by reading this booklet and asking the relevant members of staff
2 Remember
a) Do select subjects you enjoy studying
b) Do select subjects at which you are successful
c) Do ask for advice and find out everything about a subject as you will be studying it for two years
d) Do not be influenced by the choices made by your friends Their plans for the future along with
their interests and skills will not necessarily suit you Instead you must consider your own future
depending on whether you intend to go into training or further education in Sixth Form
e) Do not select a subject because you like a teacher You may have a different teacher
f) Each student is encouraged to select a broad and balanced curriculum as this will provide a
suitable platform from which further career decisions can be made A broad and balanced
curriculum would include a subject from the Arts Humanities Technology and a Language
3 If in doubthellipask
4 You will find it helpful to talk to your parents or carers subject teachers other relatives and friends form
tutor
5 If you are still unsure about your option choices contact should be made with your subject teachers your
Tutor Mr Spaul Head of Year 9 or Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher
6 Lastly we will make every effort to allocate your preferred option choices However there are occasions
when this will not be possible for example
a) too few students have selected a particular subject or
b) in the professional opinion of staff the student would not be suited to the subject selected or
c) it may not be possible to timetable all the combinations selected by students
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
The Option Process
This booklet is only one of the ways that we help students make their choice of subjects The preparation for
choosing options includes the following
The Option Information Evening ndash Thursday 16st January 2020
This evening is an opportunity for parents and students to gather information and ask questions about our options
system and the Key Stage 4 curriculum Students will have additional opportunities as detailed below to find out
about the option process in school
Year 9 Parentsrsquo Evening - Thursday 23rd (X side) or Tuesday 28th February 2020 (Y side)
The annual parents evening will be held on Thursday 23rd and Tuesday 28th February 2020 This is an opportunity
for parents to consult subject teachers about their childrsquos progress in each subject
Careers Advice
Year 9 students should now be aware of the implications of making particular choices If students have any specific
enquiries they should see their subject teachers Tutor Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher or Mr Corry
Deputy Headteacher
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options Form 2020-22
The final day for submitting option choices online is Thursday 13th February 2020
Study time per 2 week timetable
Core 30 periods Options 20 periods
English 9 periods Option A 5 periods
Maths 8 periods Option B 5 periods
Science 9 periods Option C 5 periods
Physical Educational 4 periods Option D 5 periods
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Options Advice for Students
After nearly three years at the school you will have experienced many aspects of a varied and extensive curriculum
As a student in Year 9 you will now have to choose to continue your work in some subjects whilst giving up others
There is insufficient time to cover every subject to examination standard
You will have a personal timetable in Year 10 and 11 built up from the selections you have made from the options
programme
Before selecting your options it would be wise to read the following advice
1 Find out about the subjects by reading this booklet and asking the relevant members of staff
2 Remember
a) Do select subjects you enjoy studying
b) Do select subjects at which you are successful
c) Do ask for advice and find out everything about a subject as you will be studying it for two years
d) Do not be influenced by the choices made by your friends Their plans for the future along with
their interests and skills will not necessarily suit you Instead you must consider your own future
depending on whether you intend to go into training or further education in Sixth Form
e) Do not select a subject because you like a teacher You may have a different teacher
f) Each student is encouraged to select a broad and balanced curriculum as this will provide a
suitable platform from which further career decisions can be made A broad and balanced
curriculum would include a subject from the Arts Humanities Technology and a Language
3 If in doubthellipask
4 You will find it helpful to talk to your parents or carers subject teachers other relatives and friends form
tutor
5 If you are still unsure about your option choices contact should be made with your subject teachers your
Tutor Mr Spaul Head of Year 9 or Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher
6 Lastly we will make every effort to allocate your preferred option choices However there are occasions
when this will not be possible for example
a) too few students have selected a particular subject or
b) in the professional opinion of staff the student would not be suited to the subject selected or
c) it may not be possible to timetable all the combinations selected by students
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Options Advice for Students
After nearly three years at the school you will have experienced many aspects of a varied and extensive curriculum
As a student in Year 9 you will now have to choose to continue your work in some subjects whilst giving up others
There is insufficient time to cover every subject to examination standard
You will have a personal timetable in Year 10 and 11 built up from the selections you have made from the options
programme
Before selecting your options it would be wise to read the following advice
1 Find out about the subjects by reading this booklet and asking the relevant members of staff
2 Remember
a) Do select subjects you enjoy studying
b) Do select subjects at which you are successful
c) Do ask for advice and find out everything about a subject as you will be studying it for two years
d) Do not be influenced by the choices made by your friends Their plans for the future along with
their interests and skills will not necessarily suit you Instead you must consider your own future
depending on whether you intend to go into training or further education in Sixth Form
e) Do not select a subject because you like a teacher You may have a different teacher
f) Each student is encouraged to select a broad and balanced curriculum as this will provide a
suitable platform from which further career decisions can be made A broad and balanced
curriculum would include a subject from the Arts Humanities Technology and a Language
3 If in doubthellipask
4 You will find it helpful to talk to your parents or carers subject teachers other relatives and friends form
tutor
5 If you are still unsure about your option choices contact should be made with your subject teachers your
Tutor Mr Spaul Head of Year 9 or Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher
6 Lastly we will make every effort to allocate your preferred option choices However there are occasions
when this will not be possible for example
a) too few students have selected a particular subject or
b) in the professional opinion of staff the student would not be suited to the subject selected or
c) it may not be possible to timetable all the combinations selected by students
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Overview
Core Curriculum
At Brakenhale all students at Key Stage 4 will study the following courses to examination level at GCSE
English Language
English Literature
Mathematics
Science
A Humanity (Geography or History)
A Language for Blue and Green pathway students
In addition students will have lessons in Physical Education
Optional Curriculum
The remainder of the curriculum is chosen by the students and is accessed through one of four curriculum
pathways green blue yellow and purple This booklet covers all pathways but the courses available to you have
been highlighted in a previous letter In the event of you being unsure of this please ask Mr Corry or Mrs Best
It is important for students to consider the courses most suitable for them taking into account their own strengths
and weaknesses The first part of the process is to find out about the courses and how they are assessed This
handbook contains a great deal of information for students and parents about the courses being offered Parents
also have an opportunity to find out more about courses at the Year 9 Options Evening on Thursday 16th January
2020
We believe that the curriculum pathway recommended for your child will offer the best route to success at Key
Stage 4 This suggestion has been based on the studentrsquos performance and aptitude so far at Key Stage 3 Students
should find that within the recommended pathway they will be able to choose the subjects that they believe are
appropriate for them Further guidance and advice are available from Mr Cooper Acting Assistant Headteacher and
Mr Corry Deputy Headteacher throughout the options process Both will be available at the parents meetings for
consultation over this process
Furthermore Mr Corry will be available for 20 minute appointments booked through reception
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
YEAR 9 OPTIONS 2020-22 Core Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
GCSE English Language
GCSE English Literature
GCSE Mathematics
GCSE Science
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
1 Language
+ 2 option choices
1 Humanity (Geography or History)
+ 3 option choices
Additional Literacy amp Numeracy
+ 3 option choices
Option Subjects
Green Blue Yellow Purple
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
BTEC First in Sport
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
GCSE Computer Science
GCSE Business Studies
GCSE Economics
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
GCSE Physical Education
GCSE Music
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
GCSE Business Studies
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
GCSE Media Studies
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE French
GCSE Spanish
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles GCSE Art amp Design - Photography
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
GCSE Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
GCSE Drama
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
GCSE Geography
GCSE History
GCSE Religious Studies
OCR Cambridge National in ICT
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC Creative Media
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
GCSE Design amp Technology
WJEC Hospitality amp Catering
BTEC Tech Award in Health amp Social Care
BTEC First in Sport
BTEC First in Music
BTEC Performing Arts - Dance
BTEC Performing Arts - Drama
The following combination of subjects are not allowed
BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise and GCSE Business Studies
BTEC First in Sport and GCSE Physical Education
BTEC Performing Arts Drama and BTEC Performing Arts Dance
GCSE Music and BTEC First in Music
GCSE Art amp Design ndash Fine Art and GCSE Art amp Design ndash Textiles
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CORE
SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LANGUAGE (AQA)
GCSE English Language will allow you to demonstrate the use of English in real life investigate how language is used and draw on your own experience
The specification is designed to inspire and motivate students providing appropriate stretch and challenge whilst
ensuring that the assessment and texts are as far as possible accessible to all
Two equally-balanced papers (Paper I ndash Explorations in Creative Reading and Writing Paper II ndash Non-fiction Writersrsquo Viewpoints and Perspectives) each assess a range of reading and writing competencies in an integrated
way A range of skills are taught and assessed over the two years including
summarising
comparison
analysing of structure and language
evaluation
descriptive and writing to express a viewpoint using a range of linguistic devices and vocabulary
These skills enable students to read understand and analyse a wide range of different sources and texts from the 19th 20th and 21st century as well as communicate clearly with concise written skills
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ENGLISH LITERATURE (AQA)
GCSE English Literature offers you the chance to study classic literature and some contemporary novels too
Poetry ndash use the skills you have learnt to interpret poems Poetry is about you developing your knowledge and analytical skills to be able to express your personal opinion of some complex themes such as power control conflict
and identity
Shakespeare the 19th Century novel and Modern Texts ndash understand the themes ideas and characters and why
these texts still have huge appeal today You couldhellip act out one of the most famous roles in history ndash like Macbeth
In the long term whatever job you seek from Architecture to Zoology GCSE English Language and GCSE English Literature provide the skills and confidence for you to develop your analytical and written capabilities to
help you to
work independently
be creative think critically
analyse carefully
communicate your ideas with confidence and think logically
They will help you land that dream job Sports journalist Lawyer Film director Public relations executive Fashion
journalist Author Newsreader Politician Actor Architect Creative director Scriptwriter Teacher
Miss D OrsquoBrien
Head of English
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MATHS GCSE (Edexcel 1MA1)
Values of the Mathematics Department
The Mathematics department at The Brakenhale School is committed to making learning Mathematics an enjoyable experience We aim to provide students with a positive classroom atmosphere where learning and progression are
the focus of each lesson To ensure that we help students reach their full potential staff are committed to ensuring that they challenge students in lessons and as well as providing breadth across the curriculum we try to ensure
that students have deep understanding of the Mathematics skills they have been learning
Course Content
The mathematics course has changed in recent years there has been the introduction of some new topics to the
GCSE Below there is a table of the five main mathematical categories that are required for the Maths GCSE in
addition to this you will find how this is distributed within the foundation and higher tiers
Maths Category Foundation
Content
Higher
Content
Number 25 15
Ratio Proportion amp Rates of Change 25 20
Algebra 20 30
Geometry and Measures 15 20
Statistics and Probability 15 15
Assessment
There are 3 exams for the Maths GCSE 1 non-calculator and 2 calculator papers These are all 1 hour and
30 minutes long and each worth 80 marks The grades will be calculated by adding together the marks across all 3 papers once this is done the
students will be awarded one grade
There are two tiers in maths higher and foundation There is more emphasis on students remembering the formulas and fewer will be given to the students on
the formula sheet in the exam The questions will have a greater emphasis on problem solving
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are encouraged to use their mathematical skills to tackle day-to-day problems mathematics is part of everyday life and has applications in a number of different future career paths
Mrs C Masson
Head of Maths
Dean Schlicter
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
CombinedSingle SCIENCE GCSE (OCR Gateway 9 ndash 1)
Course Content
The grading system of using A to G will be replaced by a numeric system 9 to 1 (with 9 being at the top of the
scale ndash those on the GCSE Combined Science course will achieve a double grade of either 9-9 to 1-1) The scheme of assessment will consist of two tiers foundation tier and higher tier Foundation tier assesses grades 5 to 1 (5-5
to 1-1) and higher tier assesses grades 9 to 4 (9-9 to 4-4)
Students will study content from Biology Chemistry and Physics across throughout GCSE Science Alongside the
content students will complete a variety of mandatory practical investigations that they will be assessed on as part of their final exam A summary of the content covered can be found below
Biology Chemistry Physics
Cell Biology
Organisation
Infection and Response
Bioenergetics
Homeostasis and response
Inheritance variation and
evolution
Ecology
Atomic Structure and the
periodic table
Bonding structure and the
properties of matter
Quantitative chemistry
Chemical changes
Energy changes
The rate and extent of
chemical change
Organic chemistry
Chemical analysis
Chemistry of the atmosphere
Using resources
Forces
Energy
Waves
Electricity
Magnetism and
electromagnetism
Particle model of matter
Atomic structure
Assessment
For Combined Science students will six papers at the end of Year 11 two biology two chemistry and two physics
Each paper is 1 hour 15 minutes is out of 70 marks and is worth 167 of the overall GCSE qualification Students can achieve a grade of 9-9 to 1-1 There are higher or foundation tiers of entry (A foundation tier is limited to
maximum of a 5-5)
Enrichment Opportunities - Single Sciences
At the end of Year 10 students will be tested against the content theyrsquove been taught in Year 9 and Year 10 to
assess their suitability to do individual Sciences in Biology Chemistry and Physics These will be assessed through the same exam board with the content being significantly greater with longer exam papers
Mr J Radcliffe
Head of Science
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION (no exam)
It is a government requirement of all schools to provide Physical Education lessons to students at Key Stage 4
The focus within the upper school for studentsrsquo Physical Education lessons will be about choice independence and challenge in what they do Students at The Brakenhale School will choose half termly options at the beginning of the year via an online form sent via email to their school account There will be a deadline for them to choose their preferred options if they
do not complete them they will be chosen for them Students will have a number of choices to pick from based on the number of staff on each lesson They can then choose their areas of specific foci throughout the year which
will include a variety of options including a range of teamindividual gamessports fitness and health activities
and leadership and coaching activities The options will enable all students to maximise their time within the subject but also their skill and ability levels In terms of assessment students will be assessed against three main themes independence of learning personal organisation and the ability to work to task in a specific unit of work showing physical progress It is vital that we
assess and ensure a valid and relevant programme of activities is reported on as one of the key aims of the department is to ensure that we inspire an active lifestyle within our students and embed a love and passion for
lifelong activity in sport and exercise
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OPTION SUBJECTS
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GEOGRAPHY GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Geography
Studying Geography at GCSE will allow you to develop
Your understanding of geographical concepts and processes to understand and interpret our changing world
As global citizens who recognise the challenges of sustainability and the implications for the own and
others lives Connections between the different aspects of Geography
Intellectual skills such as judging evidence in order to make informed decisions and to develop reasoned arguments
Research skills such as using a range of methods for the collection and analysis of data through
undertaking fieldwork Transferable skills such as teamwork problem solving IT skills and communication skills (presentation
writing debating)
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1
Urban Issues and Challenges
Fieldwork Resources
Term 2 The Challenge of Natural Hazards
Term 3 Physical Landscapes in the UK
Year 11
Term 1 Fieldwork The Changing Economic World
Term 2 The Changing Economic World Decision Making Exercise
Term 3 Revision and exams
Assessment
The course is divided into three examinations Paper 1 (Living with the physical environment) is 1 frac12 hours long and is worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 2 (Challenges in the human environment) is also 1 frac12 hours long and is
worth 35 of your GCSE Paper 3 is a response to fieldwork and the decision making exercise it is 1 hour 15
minutes long and is worth 30 of your GCSE
Enrichment Opportunities
All students are readily able to use their skills across all of their subjects to help improve their attainment The
benefit of studying Geography is that it opens up hundreds of pathways for employment due to its breadth of study and development of skills Fieldwork will undoubtedly improve studentsrsquo learning through experience and provide
real world examples to the theory they are studying
Geography Department
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HISTORY GCSE (Edexcel)
lsquoHistory gives answers only to those
who know how to ask the questionsrsquo
Hajo Holborn - German-American historian
Why study GCSE History
History is a fascinating subject that teaches us many important life skills that employers value The study of History will enable you to develop a wide range of skills whilst gaining a better understanding of the modern world This
course will support you to develop your ability to analyse and evaluate a range of different source types (from
newspapers to modern blockbuster films) to pick apart and create interpretations of historical events to discuss people and moments of historical significance and to undertake independent research
This course has been developed to give you an opportunity to develop your historical knowledge which can lead
to further study at A Level and degree or transferable skills for the workplace
Course Content (Please note that as this is a new specification the course structure may change)
Thematic Study and historic environment Crime and punishment in Britain c1000ndashpresent and Whitechapel c1870ndashc1900 crime policing and the inner city
Period study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91
British depth study Early Elizabethan England 1558ndash88
Modern depth study Weimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39
Assessment
There are three summer exams sat at the end of Year 11
Thematic Study and historic environment 1 hour 15 minutes (worth 30)
Period study and British depth study 1 hour 45 minutes (worth 40)
Modern depth study 1 hour and 20 minutes (worth 30) The award gained is graded on the GCSE 9-1 scale
Enrichment Opportunities
We run two extra support sessions (one at lunch and one afterschool) we are also planning some new and
exciting trips to enhance the learning experience
Miss D Bunkell Head of History
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE COMPUTER SCIENCE (OCR J277)
The subject that teaches you how to think
Why study GCSE Computer Science
Computers are widely used in all aspects of business industry government education leisure and the home In
this technological age a study of computer science and particularly how computers are used in the solution of a variety of problems is essential to learners Computer science integrates well with subjects across the curriculum
It demands both logical discipline and imaginative creativity
Our GCSE in Computer Science is engaging and practical encouraging creativity and problem solving It encourages
students to develop their understanding and application of the core concepts in computer science Students also analyse problems in computational terms and devise creative solutions by designing writing testing and evaluating
programs
Course Content
Content Overview Assessment Overview
Computer systems
Systems architecture
Memory and storage
Computer networks connections and protocols
Network security Systems software
Ethical legal cultural and environmental impacts of digital technology
Computer systems
(Component 1)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Computational thinking algorithms and
programming
Algorithms Programming fundamentals
Producing robust programs Boolean logic
Programming languages and Integrated
Development Environments
Computational thinking
algorithms and
programming
(Component 2)
80 marks
1 hour and 30 minutes
Written paper
(no calculators allowed)
50
Of total
GCSE
Programming skills
Programming techniques Analysis
Design Development
Test and refine
Programming project
Software development
Unweighted
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The subject content for GCSE Computer Science will be assessed across three components Whist there is a degree of overlap between the content in Component 1 and Component 2 the context in which this content is assessed
differs In Component 1 content is assessed in a theoretical way whereas in Component 2 it is assessed through its use within programs and algorithms
Enrichment Opportunities
With technology ever changing there is a demand for professionals who are qualified in this area If you want to
go on to higher study and employment in the field of Computer Science you will find that this course provides a
superb stepping stone Once you have taken GCSE Computer Science and you can then progress to study the
subject at A Level and then university
Mr A George
Head of IT and Computer Science
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies (OCR)
Why study OCR Cambridge National in Information Technologies
Data Manipulation and Project Management are vital skills for success in employment and higher education and are among the key transferable skills required by employers The Cambridge National in Information Technologies
develops students understanding of these skills through the development of creative products to solve real world data problems Taking this qualification will prepare your child for a career in a data driven future
Course Content
Students develop their knowledge and understanding of different hardware and software applications and the tools and techniques used to select store manipulate and present data They also explore the various risks associated
with the collection storage and use of data including legal moral ethical and security issues and how such risks
can be mitigated For the coursework element students create a technological solution that processes data and communicates
information following the phases of the project life cycle using different hardware and software technologies to create an integrated technological solution They develop practical skills such as carrying out a SWOT analysis
creating GANTT charts developing online surveys and presenting data through web-based technologies
Assessment
R012 Understanding tools techniques methods and processes for technological solutions Written paper - 1
hour 45 minutes worth 50 of the overall grade R013 Developing technological solutions Centre-assessed task Approx 20 hours 50 of the overall grade The coursework unit (R013) will be a set assignment that assesses a studentrsquos ability to develop a technological
solution to a real world problem
Enrichment Opportunities
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides successful candidates with a potential stepping stone towards entering employment in positions such as IT technical sales specialist Website Designer or Mobile App Developer
The OCR Cambridge Nationals in ICT provides the skills knowledge and understanding for Level 2 learners to progress to
Other level 2 vocational qualifications Level 3 qualifications
Academic Qualifications in Computing
Mr A George Head of IT and Computing
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BUSINESS STUDIES GCSE
(Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Business Studies
This course will suit students who have an interest in Business If you want to work in a business or even set up your own then this course could be suited to you Successful students will have an interest in current affairs and
enjoy discussing real issues that face businesses today
The key areas of marketing and finance are studied in depth Students will also learn about recruitment staff
motivation employment law and management structures
Teaching includes using real organisations as case studies to understand concepts as well as the opportunity to work as part of a team to work on a new business idea of their choice
Business studies provides the opportunity to learn key life skills such as team working presentation skills communication skills market research techniques and negotiation skills
This course will prepare students for work within the business sector It also leads onto further education by
serving as a useful grounding for A Business Studies Economics and Law
Course Content
Year 10 Theme 1 Investigating small business
Year 11 Theme 2 Building a Business
Assessment
This course is assessed through two exams Theme 1 ndash 50 and Theme 2 -50
Enrichment Opportunities
This course with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting
an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms and so students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ECONOMICS GCSE (OCR)
Why study Economics
Economics provides you with the knowledge and insight necessary to understand the impact of developments in business society and the world economy It enables you to understand the decisions of households firms and
governments based on human behaviour beliefs structure constraints and need
The skills you will learn in GCSE Economics are easily transferable to a number of careers such as banking
insurance retail public sector accountancy and management
Course Content
During the course you will learn to be able to answer the following questions
Year 10 ndashIntroduction to economics bull What is the economic problem bull What is a competitive market
bull What are the role of markets
bull What are demand and supply
bull What are the economic objectives of a government bull How does the UK government raise and spend money
bull How does the labour market work
Year 11 ndash National and International Economics bull What is unemployment bull How do countries develop
bull What is environmental sustainability
bull What is balance of payments
bull What is the difference between fiscal and monetary policy bull What are the benefits of globalisation to customers and workers
bull How do changes in exchange rates affect customers
bull Why is international trade important
Assessment
Unit 1 ndash Introduction to Economics ndash The role of markets and money 50 of the total GCSE marks 1
hour 30 minutes Written paper worth 80 marks
Unit 2 ndash Economic objectives and the role of Government ndash International trade and the global economy 50 of the total GCSE marks 1 hour 30 minutes Written paper 80 marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Economics will be delivered as part of the Business Studies Department which offers a wide range of enrichment activities for students from extra-curricular opportunities There are opportunities for trips within the local area and
also a trip to The Bank of England in London in order to enhance students understanding of Economics and its impact on day to day life
Mrs C Masson Head of Economics
Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH AWARD IN ENTERPRISE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Tech Award in Enterprise
BTEC qualifications are designed to be more hands-on courses to provide students with more experiences
relating to the real work place
Course Content
With the new BTEC award in enterprise students will explore what it means to set up and run a business
enterprise as well as develop key skills and discover potential careers The course is centred around building on real-life scenarios to demonstrate knowledge skills and best practice
behaviours
The Award gives learners the opportunity to develop sector-specific knowledge and skills in a practical learning
environment The main focus is on the knowledge understanding and skills required to research plan pitch and review an enterprise idea that includes
development of key skills that prove aptitude in planning an enterprise activity including market research planning carrying out financial transactions communication and problem solving
knowledge that underpins effective use of skills such as the features and characteristics of enterprises
and entrepreneurs and the internal and external factors that can affect the performance of an enterprise
attitudes and ways of working that are considered most important for enterprise including monitoring
and reflecting on performance of an enterprise idea and own use of skills
Assessment
The course is assessed by three different units
Unit 1 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 2 ndash Assessed internally by the school and is a practical assignment
Unit 3 ndash Assessed externally by Edexcel and is a task based assignment
Enrichment Opportunities
This course provides students with skills that can help in all areas of their studies such as being able to feel comfortable in presenting an idea to other students They will be able to communicate ideas to other students and
work as part of a team in other subjects
Lessons are taught in the ICT suite of classrooms where students will have the opportunity to improve their ICT
skills All the life skills learnt in Business Studies will help students in their future employment
Mr A George
Head of Business Studies
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MEDIA STUDIES GCSE (AQA Syllabus 8572)
Why study GCSE Media Studies
Media Studies allows you to understand key concepts of a very important and constantly changing aspect of our
world The media is all around us and this course will allow you to develop both practical and theoretical skills in
the media Media Studies is for you if
You enjoyed the Media scheme of work covered in English
You enjoy discussing and debating how the Media use techniques to persuade and manipulate
You have an interest in how messages are communicated including Social Media Radio and TV newspapers and magazines
You are creative and enjoy the thought of creating your own media products
You are interested in how the media creates meaning for the audience
You are interested in how media industries work and how they sell their products to the audience
You want to learn how to use new technologies
You are interested in how media will change in this fast moving world
A GCSE in Media Studies will give you the opportunity to continue studying Media Studies or Film Studies at A Level
or BTEC It will also provide you with the skills to continue the subject at university
The analytical skills will open doors not only to universities but future jobs too Careers can vary from teaching
journalism marketing publishing to PR
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Studying Key Concepts and Theories (Industries Audiences and Representation)
Term 2 Studying Media Products Media Language and contexts of the media
Term 3
NEA (coursework) preparation Planning for and producing a media product in a
chosen industry (eg could be a front cover contents page and double-page spread of a magazine or a film trailer or a music video etc) This would be in preparation
for the assessed brief given in September of Year 11
Year 11
Term 1 NEA production - Students will plan and produce one media product (either audio-visual online or print form) set from a given brief provided by the exam board This
set brief changes annually
Term 2
Studying Paper 2 (6 specific Close Study Products (CSPs) provided by the exam
board for study from September of Year 11 onwards)
Paper 1 will also be studiedre-visited across this term
Term 3 Exam practiserevision Paper 1
Exam practiserevision Paper 2
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
NEA - Non ndashexam assessment (coursework) ndash 30 of overall GCSE grade
Coursework assignments focus on an annually changing topic (typically film gaming music social media or print industries) Students will be required to show both practical and theoretical skills to be successful with these tasks
and will produce a media product for an intended audience
Exam ndash 70 of overall GCSE grade
Paper 1 ndash Industries Audiences and Representation 1 hour 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Paper 2 ndash Media Products and their contexts ndash 1 hour and 30 minutes 35 of overall GCSE mark (mixture of
multiple choice short answer and extended response questions)
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Media Studies provides an opportunity for learners to understand more about the scope of creative media
production and develop knowledge about the creative media industries Transferable skills are those such as communication practical evaluative research literacy and analysis etc which are valued in both higher education
and the workplace
Mrs T Cresswell
Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in Creative Media Production (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndashExploring media products ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course
During component 1 students will
bull Content and purpose of digital media products
bull Style and the use of digital design principles bull Idea generation and the production process
bull Industry regulations and professional practices
Component 2 ndashDeveloping digital media production skills ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
bull Experiment with a variety of media production skills and techniques
bull Apply the technical skills that they learn bull Reflect on their progress and use of skills as well as how they could improve
Component 3 ndash Create a media product in response to a brief ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course During component 3 students will
bull Learn how to respond to a media brief
bull Plan their response to the brief
bull Apply skills and techniques to a production bull Justify the process and outcome that they have developed
bull Reflect on their application of skills time management and use of resources
Key Features of this Qualification
It is a level 2 qualification however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2
Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the creative media industries such as TV Film Gaming and Social Media
Mrs T Cresswell Head of Media Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
FRENCH GCSE (AQA Specification 8658)
Why study GCSE French
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you
intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign
language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of French as fun and challenging as possible by using a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring
the language to life This includes use of French pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current
and future study and employment
Identity and culture
Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in French speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region
Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment
My studies Life at schoolcollege
Education post-16 Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and French
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in French for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
SPANISH GCSE (AQA Specification 8698)
Why study GCSE Spanish
Learning another language is a brilliant way to challenge yourself and open your mind up in new ways Developing
understanding and use of a foreign language also enables you to enrich your experiences abroad whether you intend to use your skills for leisure or professional purposes in the future It also nurtures valuable transferable
skills such as logic deduction inference memorisation and thinking on your feet
The new government focus on the EBacc places more emphasis than ever on the importance of having a foreign language to GCSE level It is a rigorous qualification which looks impressive to both employers and universities
and opens up real scope for opportunity in future years
At The Brakenhale School we endeavour to make the study of Spanish as fun and challenging as possible by using
a range of authentic materials and a variety of speaking listening reading and writing activities which aim to bring the language to life This includes use of Spanish pop music magazine articles and television clips to bring
relevance to the study of the language and enhance studentsrsquo language skills as fully as we can
Course Content
There are three core themes covered during the course which are used as a basis for examination at the end of
Year 11 These are Identity and culture Local national international and global areas of interest and Current and future study and employment
Identity and culture Me my family and friends relationships with family and friends marriagepartnership Technology in everyday life social media mobile technology Free-time activities music cinema and TV food and eating out sport Customs and festivals in Spanish speaking countriescommunities
Local national international and global areas of interest
Home town neighbourhood and region Social issues charityvoluntary work healthyunhealthy living
Global issues the environment povertyhomelessness
Travel and tourism
Current and future study and employment My studies Life at schoolcollege Education post-16
Jobs career choices and ambitions
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
On the AQA specification all four language skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) are assessed at the end of Year 11 in four separate exams and are worth 25 each The course builds on the grammar and vocabulary
developed at Key Stage 3 and places more emphasis on spontaneity of communication and accuracy of translations into both English and Spanish
Listening and Reading exams follow a similar format to those in Key Stage 3 the only exception being that students will be expected to answer certain questions in Spanish for which they are prepared in class
The Speaking exam is divided into three parts The Foundation exam lasts 7-9 minutes and the Higher exam lasts
10-12 minutes Students are also given some preparation time before entering the exam Firstly students perform
a short role play with their class teacher who is the examiner Secondly students engage in a picture based discussion Finally students have a general conversation with the teacher on topics they have covered through
the GCSE course
In the Writing exam students are given bullet point prompts to write at length in exam conditions They must
also complete translations and in the higher tier must also complete an open-ended writing task of approximately 150 words
Mrs Hughes
Head of Modern Foreign Languages
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash FINE ART GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Art
The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life With the UKrsquos creative industries now worth
pound714 billion per year to the UK economy Art GCSE provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to topics allowing individual creativity to flourish Learning to become more aware of your surroundings
by looking at your environment through a creative perspective where possibilities are endless
Course Content
Through GCSE Art students will learn skills processes and techniques both two dimensional and three dimensional
Students investigate how to critically analyse art works and how to translate thoughts and narrative into their own practice Students will be taught how to structure their projects and how to follow a working process which is vital
in meeting all the assessment objectives Central to the ethos of the department is the opportunity for students to
develop their work in any chosen direction and in a personal manner with help and guidance from their teacher
Assessment
Unit 1
Coursework folder (60)
Students will develop two personal projects across Year 10 The start
of the course will consist of workshop based lessons introducing a variety of materials and techniques which will feed into the first themed
project Themes may cover Natural forms Identity Cultures Surfaces for example
Year 11 will consist of one coursework project using a previous exam paper as the starting point and then begin preparatory work towards
the final exam The two most successful projects will be entered for the coursework unit
Unit 2 Externally set assignment (40)
Students create a personalised project based on an externally set theme and have approximately 11 weeks for preparatory work and 10 hours
in which to complete a final outcome in exam conditions
Enrichment Opportunities
Not only will you become a more confident artist you will have the opportunity to develop transferable skills such
as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique All of which are highly transferable skills and applied
in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN ndash TEXTILES GCSE
(AQA)
GCSE Art amp Design (Textiles) teaches students about the development of Textiles-based art and contemporary
fashion This is an exciting course with a creative approach If you enjoy designing or working with fabric thread and dyes then this is the course for you Textile designers work in many ways to create ideas materials and
techniques for different purposes such as fashion theatre performance and retail This is an exciting GCSE specification which seeks to encourage a creative approach in a contemporary changing and multi-cultural
society The course seeks to equip students with the skills to create enjoy and engage with the visual arts
Assessment
Component 1 Portfolio NEA 60
Component 2 Externally set assignment Portfolio of preparatory studies + 10h practical exam 40
You cannot study both Art amp Design (Art) and Art amp Design (Textiles)
This final coursework project brings all skills and techniques together giving students the opportunity to select
specific techniques to improve and refine whilst working towards the design development of their final outcome
ldquoThe Exam Projectrdquo ndash this project requires you to work more independently on a theme set by the exam board
The outcome and media is decided individually between teacher and student to choose what best suits you You will be following the AQA Art amp Design specification with Textiles as a specialism
httpfilestoreaqaorgukresourcesart-and-designspecificationsAQA-ART-GCSE-SP-2016PDF
Enrichment Opportunities
A qualification in Art will
bull Show an employer you are creative and imaginative with original ideas and strong presentation skills You will also have demonstrated a good level of organisation and self-awareness
bull Develop the way you look at and think about the world around you
bull Build your cultural knowledge and passion for design and the Arts bull Enable you to study Art Graphics Textiles or Fashion at A-Level or BTEC and eventually an Arts degree such
as Fine Art Fashion and Theatre Design or university degrees in disciplines like Architecture Advertising Animation Film and Media Marketing Illustration Education or Museum Work
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
ART amp DESIGN - PHOTOGRAPHY GCSE
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Photography The creative industry influences a large portion of our modern life Photography provides students with an opportunity to develop personal responses to themes allowing individual creativity to flourish Students will learn
to become more aware of their surroundings by viewing their environments through a creative perspective where the possibilities are endless Course Content Whilst studying GCSE Photography students will learn skills processes and techniques surrounding lens based media on both technical and practical levels Students will investigate how to use their camera and different sources
of lighting to create photographic outcomes supported with creative and technical use of Adobe Photoshop Examples of photographic topics you may cover are portraiture landscape studio nature documentary etc Assessment
Unit 1 Coursework project
(60)
In Year 10 students will carry out a range of photographic exercises in the initial stage
of the GCSE and then will progress on to creating personal responses to given themes
that they will then support with a range of skills such as contextual analysis interpretation digital and physical manipulation Photoshop planning experimentation
and evaluation to develop individual outcomes Year 11 begins with the project lsquoTo Colour or not to Colourrsquo in which students will explore
the role of colour and monochrome in photography using this investigation to produce
a personal response in the photographic genre of their choice
Unit 2 Externally set
assignment (40)
From the January in Year 11 students create a personal response to an externally set theme where they will be given 10-11 weeks to create preparatory work and 10 hours
continuous and supervised time in exam conditions to produce a portfolio of work and
a final outcome
Enrichment Opportunities Not only will you learn to take photographs using different techniques and styles you will have the opportunity to
develop transferable skills such as the ability to use IT software such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Photoshop
creative and practical problem solving developing ideas through research practical application analysis and critique which are highly transferable skills applicability in many walks of life
Miss T Wilhelmy Teacher in Charge of Art amp Photography
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE DESIGN amp TECHNOLOGY
(AQA)
Why study GCSE Design amp Technology
Design and Technology will prepare students to participate confidently and successfully in an increasingly
technological world Design is an industry that is involved in all aspects of business whether it is a tangible product or a system This course will give them skills to communicate innovate and think laterally as an individual and
also as a team
Course Content
The brand new GCSE in Design and Technology is an exciting and challenging course GCSE Design and Technology
combines a wide range of subjects and life skills in a creative practical way It allows students to develop problem solving skills and encourages students to use and apply knowledge from all areas of the curriculum to create design
solutions
Students will study a range of materials including wood metal plastics paper textiles They will be given the opportunity to select and use a range of appropriate materials to solve a range of design challenges which are in
context to the world around us
You will undertake
Several mini projects to develop knowledge skills and understanding across a range of material disciplines (Textiles RM and Graphics)
A substantial design and make task that involves investigating designing making analysing and evaluating a project of your choice Your portfolio and prototype will be assessed by your teachers and moderated by
the exam board
The exam at the end of the course
Assessment
Unit 1 2 Hour Written Examination 100 marks 50 of final marks
Unit 2 Substantial design and make task
Non-Examined Assessment (30-35 hours approx) 100 marks 50 of final marks
Enrichment Opportunities
Design and Technology provides you with the skills that employers and Further Education course providers seek
from applicants in the UK and the rest of the world
o solving problems with creative and innovative strategies
o being logical and pragmatic interested in the process necessary for an ideaconcept to become a
product
o being conscious of global social cultural and environmental issues in relation to Design and Technology
ldquoDesign and Technology is a phenomenally important subject Logical creative and practical itrsquos the only opportunity students have to apply what they learn in Maths and Science ndash directly preparing them for a career in
Design and Engineeringrdquo Sir James Dyson Founder and Chairman of Dyson
Mrs S Higham
Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
HOSPITALITY amp CATERING - LEVEL 12
(WJEC)
According to the British Hospitality Association hospitality and catering is Britainrsquos fourth largest industry and
accounts for around 10 of the total workforce This varied and interesting course will give you an insight and
understanding of this industry and give you the chance to be part of it if you wish in future
The NEW Level 1 2 Hospitality and Catering is a GCSE equivalent qualification
What will I do
Increase your practical skills
Gain a better understanding of the catering industry
Be able to plan cook and serve a variety of dishes to paying customers
Work both as a team and as an individual
Be involved with the planning cooking and serving of several catering events eg 3 course lunches for external visitors
Learn how to plan menus and gain an understanding of how to plan for the dietary needs of different
groups
What examinations and assessments will I have to do
WJEC Level 12 Hospitality and Catering has been designed to develop in learners the knowledge and
understanding related to a range of hospitality and catering providers how they operate and what they have to
take into account to be successful
There is the opportunity to learn about issues related to nutrition and food safety and how they affect successful
hospitality and catering operations
Learners must complete 2 compulsory units
Unit 1 (40) is assessed externally by written exam with a focus on the hospitality and catering industry
Unit 2 (60) is assessed internally through coursework tasks with a focus on hospitality and catering in
action
In this qualification learners will also have the opportunity to develop some food preparation and cooking skills as
well as transferable skills of problem-solving organisation and time management planning and communication
Each unit will be assessed mainly on your practical work with written work to back it up
Learners who achieve this Level 12 qualification could progress onto further Level 3 qualifications and A levels
such as
WJEC Level 3 Food Science and Nutrition
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality and Tourism Management (VRQ)
Level 3 Diploma in Hospitality Supervision and Leadership principles (QCF)
Level 3 Certificate in Hospitality and Catering Principles (professional cookery)
Level 3 Award in Practical Food Safety Supervision for Catering (QCF)
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
What will be expected of me
Be prepared to cook and taste a variety of foods and bring ingredients into school on a weekly basis
Pride in your work
To continue developing your continually assessed units of work in your own time - (Home Learning)
Mrs S Higham Head of Design Technology
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC TECH Award in HEALTH amp SOCIAL CARE (Edexcel)
Course Content and Assessment
The course is made up of three components two internally assessed and one that is externally assessed The assessment structure has been designed so that students can build on what they learn and develop their
assignments skills as the move through the course
Component 1 ndash Human Lifespan Development ndash Internally assessed - 30 of the total course During component 1 students will
Explore how individuals develop physically emotionally socially and intellectually over time
Investigate how various factors events and choices impact individualsrsquo growth and development Discover how people adapt to life events and cope with making changes
Component 2 ndash Health and Social Care Services and Values ndash Internally assessed -30 of the total course
During component 2 students will
Learn which health and social care services are available Identify why people might need to use these services
Discover whorsquos involved in proving these services Explore what might stop people from accessing the services they need
Look at the care values the sector has to make sure people get the protection they need
Component 3 ndash Health and Wellbeing ndash Externally assessed - 40 of the total course
During component 3 students will Learn what lsquobeing healthy means to different people
Explore the different factors that might influence health and wellbeing Identify key health indicators and how to interpret them
Assess an individualrsquos health using what theyve learned
Create a health and wellbeing improvement plan for that person which includes targets and recommendations of support services available
Reflect on the potential challenges the person may face when putting the plan into action
Key Features of this Qualification
This qualification is a brand new qualification and will be first assessed in Summer 2019 It is a level 2 qualification
however it is graded at Level 2 Pass Level 2 Merit Level 2 Distinction Level 2 Distinction Level 1 Distinction Level 1 Merit and Level 1 pass and Unclassified
The course is a 120 guided-learning hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to one GCSE) and has external
assessments for 40 of the qualification Edexcel sets and marks these assessments
Enrichment Opportunities
The qualification provides routes for continuing education and future employment into many diverse areas of the
caring professions including Caring Nursing Occupational Therapy Social and Community Work Working with
Children Counselling and Teaching
Mr B Coley
Teacher ic of Health amp Social Care
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
PHYSICAL EDUCATION GCSE (OCR)
Why study GCSE Physical Education
Why study GCSE Physical Education For sports lovers and budding physiotherapists future professional footballers or someone who is enthusiastic
about health and fitness this is the course for you GCSE Physical Education offers exciting opportunities to be involved in a range of physical activities from basketball to Hockey trampolining to rugby rounders to football all
of which promote an active and healthy lifestyle Course Content and Assessment Component 1 - Physical Factors Affecting Performance This examined component introduces and explores physical factors which underpin physical activities and sports Learners will start to explore the way in which the parts of the human body work and function during physical
activity and physiological adaptations that can occur due to diet and training They will also develop their knowledge
and understanding of the principles of training why we train in different ways and how training plans can be made to optimise results The study of these topics will aid learners in the development of both their own practical performance and that of others
Component 2 - Socio-cultural Issues and Sports Psychology Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of sports psychology theories related to acquiring
movement skills and optimising performance Learners will be able to reflect on their own learning and performance of physical activities and sports skills to recognise the key psychological concepts affecting performance Learners will develop their knowledge of socio-cultural influences that impact on participation and performance in physical activities and sports Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of how sport impacts
on society Engagement patterns of different social groups will be understood by learners along with strategies to
promote participation with practical examples The commercialisation of physical activities and sports will be understood including the influences of sponsorship
and the media Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of ethical and socio-cultural issues in physical activities and sports Learners will develop their knowledge and understanding of the benefits of participating in physical activities and sports to their health fitness and wellbeing The physical emotional and social aspects will be understood as well
as the consequences of a sedentary lifestyle
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Learners will also develop their knowledge and understanding of energy use along with diet nutrition and hydration Learners will develop the ability to collect and use data using examples from physical activities and sports Component 3 - Performance within Physical Education Learners will be required to undertake two parts within this component Part 1 Performance of three sports or activities one team one individual and one free choice Most sports are
covered on the approved list Part 2 Performance analysis of a sport or activity from the approved Department for Education (DfE) list This does not have to be the same sport or activity that was undertaken in part one although it can be This component is assessed via NEA Assessment In many areas of the specification it is expected that practical examples from physical activities and sports will be
used to show how theory can be applied and reinforce understanding Learners are required to develop knowledge and understanding of data analysis in relation to key areas of physical
activities and sports Learners should be able to
demonstrate an understanding of how data are collected ndash both qualitative and quantitative
present data including graphs and tables
analyse and evaluate data
Enrichment Opportunities GCSE PE is the ideal preparation for the A level in PE as well as for vocational qualifications such as BTECs in Sport
and Exercise sciences The course offers you a range of transferable skills such as team work leadership
independence and energy all of which employers look for Typical jobs taken by people who study the PE GCSE are physiotherapy coaching fitness instruction and personal training teaching as well as being a professional
athlete or in the Armed Forces
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC First in Sport (2018) (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Sport This course offers a practical and theoretical study that prepares students for progression onto the advanced level
courses in Sport Coaching and Development or Sport and Exercise Sciences The course is structured over the two years and you are expected to complete 4 units in total 1 external exam based unit and 3 internal coursework
units Students will be expected to take part in a variety of physical and sporting activities during their course
which also forms part of their assessments
Course Content and Assessment Units 2 3 and 6 are assessed through internal coursework assessments Internal assessment for these components
have been designed to relate to achievement of application of the conceptual underpinning for the sector through realistic tasks and activities This style of assessment promotes deep learning through ensuring the connection
between knowledge and practice
Unit 1 focuses on an external online test which last 70 minutes and consists of a range of multiple choice short
and long answer questions marked out of 60 The exam is taken in an IT room under strict exam conditions on computers and is online based
The units focus on Year 10
6 - Leading Sports Activities (Internal coursework and practical) 2 - Practical Sport (Internal coursework and practical)
Year 11
1 - Fitness for sport and Exercise (External Online Exam)
3 - Applying the Principles of Personal Training (synoptic) (Internal coursework and practical)
The design of the external assessment (Unit 1) ensures that there is sufficient stretch and challenge enabling the assessment of knowledge and understanding at the end of the unit The external assessment is based on key
topics that require learners to demonstrate that they can identify and use their learnt knowledge effectively
Pearson BTEC Level 1Level 2 First Award in Sport (2018)
Unit no Unit title GLH Level How assessed
1 Fitness for Sport and Exercise 30 12 External - exam
2 Practical Sport 30 12 Internal - cwk
3 Applying the Principles of Personal Training 30 12 Internal synoptic - cwk
6 Leading Sports Activities 30 12 Internal - cwk
Enrichment Opportunities Students may progress onto an advanced level qualification in SportSport and Exercise Science or take up
employment in the sport and leisure industry or continue on a path to becoming a professional sports coach
Mr M Potter
Head of PE
Green Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
MUSIC GCSE (Edexcel)
Why study GCSE Music
Music is an incredibly broad subject which means that students get the opportunity to study a wide range of musical genres and musical skills Students will experience playing their instrument across a number of genres
developing their instrumental abilities as well as their musical knowledge and music theory Students will also study
composition alongside this which means that students really do develop a wide range of skills and experience a varied curriculum Students also develop important transferable skills such as group work skills communication
skills rehearsalrefining skills creativity and problem solving
Course Content
Students will study the Edexcel exam board and will study compositional techniques performance skills music
theory and music history with a focus on the three main strands
Instrumental Music 1700 - 1820 Vocal Music
Music for Stage and Screen Fusions
Assessment
The course is divided into three sections
Performance 30 Students will perform one solo performance and one ensemble
performance which must last for 4 minutes combined duration
Composition 30 Students will compose two compositions of at least 3 minutes combined
duration One will be a lsquofree compositionrsquo and the other will be to a brief set
by Edexcel
ListeningAppraisingUnderstanding exam
40 Students will undertake an exam at the end of the year in which they will listen to musical examples and answer questions Students will also
answer questions on the set pieces 2 of which are compulsory and the other
based on an area of study that the student chooses
Enrichment Opportunities
GCSE Music is obviously a formal qualification in its own right It might lead to further study in Music perhaps to
BTEC Level 3 or A level at Brakenhale Beyond school Music can lead to careers in the recording industry radio or television theatre advertising teaching and importantly in areas not directly relating to music The transferrable
skills mentioned earlier also mean that employers are starting to look at music as an increasingly informative and important subject when recruiting Even if you choose not to study Music beyond GCSE you will develop insight
into one of the most important aspects of human culture
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC FIRST IN MUSIC (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Music
The BTEC in Music aims to deliver music education to students but with more of a focus on preparing students for
work within the industry This means that not only do students develop their instrumental skills and musical knowledge they also get the chance to develop their knowledge of the music industry and how it works Another
benefit of the course is that students develop the sorts of skills that employers look for as well as developing the
skills that will help them in a wider school context such as independent learning and thinking organisation problem solving meeting deadlines taking responsibility group working skills creative thinking following
instructions to meet criteria and so on
Course Content
Students will study four units from a large selection two of which are mandatory so have to be studied and the
other two we can choose depending on the cohort of students There is an outline of the units below
Mandatory units Optional Units
bull The Music Industry
bull Managing a Music Product
bull Introducing Live Sound
bull Introducing Music Composition
bull Introducing Music Performance
bull Introducing Music Recording
bull Introducing Music Sequencing
Assessment
The BTEC is assessed almost entirely with coursework and assignmenttask style evidence with the exception of lsquoThe Music Industryrsquo which is an examination unit This means that there is a wide range of assessment
opportunities for students such as performances compositions creating a CD or promoting a live music event
presentations written reports and log books
Enrichment Opportunities
The BTEC in music enables students to continue studying music but in a manner that is such more hands on and
with a focus on gaining employment in the music industry This course can lead to further study of music at college or sixth form and ultimately university This BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the same
when it comes to students results
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
DANCE GCSE (AQA)
Why study GCSE Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the GCSE Dance course you will learn to perform choreograph and analyse dance Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem
as well as your sensitivity to others and the ability to work as part of a group You will develop both your technical
and expressive skills as a dancer making you an adaptable performer and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently to
generate your own work As a critic you will learn how to evaluate and analyse dance works understanding how and why dance is created and reflecting upon your own processes
GCSE Dance provides a solid foundation for careers or further studies in dance performing arts or physical vocations but also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking
that employers and higher education institutes look for
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill learning two of the set works
Term 2 Choreographic skills and processes analysis of performance learning two of the set works
Term 3 Preparing for performance assessment choreographic
projects learning two of the set works
Year 11
Term 1 Preparing for Performance Choreography and Dance
Analysis assessments
Term 2 Assessment of Performance and Choreography
Term 3 Assessment of Dance Analysis
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 areas Performance Choreography and Dance Appreciation Performance and Choreography are both practical elements each worth 30 of the course (60 in total)
Dance Appreciation is worth 40 of the overall qualification and is a written exam of 1 hour 30 minutes focusing on the knowledge and understanding of the choreographic process performance skills and critical appreciation of
dance works
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-
curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to GCSE Dance This includes the opportunity to be part of our older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are
encouraged to perform in the dance shows and various events at the school as well as attend a range of theatre
visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth
(BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DANCE (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Dance
Dance is a powerful and expressive subject which encourages students to develop their creative physical
emotional and intellectual capacity As part of the BTEC Dance course you will learn a range of performance
choreographic and technical dance skills that would prepare you for the performing arts industry Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer You will develop your technical and expressive skills as a dancer making you adaptable in contrasting styles and improving your overall fitness As a choreographer you will explore
your ability to think creatively and problem solve working as part of a group You will explore contrasting
practitioners work through practical workshops underpinned by theory This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in dance the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as team work problem solving and critical thinking that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building technical and expressive skill focusing on
contrasting styles of dance (Induction project)
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts
Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing
Arts Exploring the Performing Arts and Performing to a Brief Each unit has a combination of practical assessments with elements of written work to support The BTEC is equivalent to the GCSE course and is lsquoworthrsquo exactly the
same when it comes to students results however the assessments are more coursework based Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts involves studying dance techniques and styles of dance
including Contemporary Jazz or Street Students select one style to learn professional movement material from a given work and complete a workshop performance (30 of final grade) During the Exploring the Performing Arts unit students will study three contrasting dance works they will conduct
their own research about the pieces and present a research journal and report based on their findings (30 of final grade) Performing to a Brief involves students creating choreography for a brief that is assigned by the exam board students need to consider their given theme and audience Students will perform their work to an audience and
submit logbook entries reflecting on their decision and progress (40 of final grade)
Enrichment Opportunities
The dance studio is open as a rehearsal space during break lunch and after school with a wide range of extra-curricular classes to participate in and study support linked to BTEC Dance This includes the opportunity to be part
of the older Dance Companies and perform at South Hill Park for lsquoLift Offrsquo Dance Festival Students are encouraged
to perform in dance shows and school events as well as attend a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year Students will take part in workshops from a range of professional external choreographers and dancers The
Dance Department is in partnership with Berkshire County Dance Company Youth (BCDCY) providing us with a range of opportunities and links to the dance industry helping to further support our students and their progression
Mrs C Duffy
Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
GCSE Drama (AQA)
Why study GCSE Drama
Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance
GCSE Drama offers you the opportunity to creatively explore texts and ideas to engage practically (as well as academically) and learn how to analyse and evaluate drama and theatre The skills will help you develop a detailed
approach to plays which will boost your English progression GCSE Drama is not just about acting The course
covers all sorts of transferable skills such as communication presentationpublic speaking group and leadership skills problem solving time management initiative and the ability to work to a deadline Drama is also a subject
to take if you want a job in the entertainment industry in front of an audience or behind the scenes It is also relevant and interesting to people who are interested in culture or social issues
Course Content
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Whats assessed
Knowledge and understanding
of drama and theatre
Study of one set play from a
choice of six
Analysis and evaluation of the
work of live theatre makers
Whats assessed
Process of creating devised
drama
Performance of devised drama
(students may contribute as performer or designer)
Analysis and evaluation of own
work
Whats assessed
Performance of two extracts
from one play (students may contribute as performer or
designer)
Free choice of play but it must
contrast with the set play
chosen for Component 1
For component 2 and 3 the subject content is assessed practically
Each student must choose to be assessed as a
bull performer or bull lighting designer or
bull sound designer or bull set designer or
bull costume designer or bull puppet designer
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment
Component 1 Understanding drama
Component 2 Devising drama (practical)
Component 3 Texts in practice (practical)
Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes
Open book 80 marks
40 of GCSE
Devising log (60 marks) Devised performance
(20 marks) 80 marks in total
40 of GCSE
Performance of Extract 1 (20 marks) and Extract 2
(20 marks) 40 marks in total
20 of GCSE
Questions
Section A multiple choice (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set
play chosen
(44 marks) Section C one question (from a
choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre
production (32 marks)
This component is marked by
teachers and moderated by AQA
This component is marked by AQA
Enrichment Opportunities
Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama
studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
BTEC PERFORMING ARTS ndash DRAMA (Edexcel)
Why study BTEC Drama Drama is a unique tool to express and explore human feeling it allows students to communicate with and
understand others in new ways whilst developing empathy and tolerance As part of the BTEC Drama course you will learn a range of different skills and techniques to develop your understanding of the subject The BTEC course is designed to prepare you for the performing arts industry and
give you an insight into what it is like to be a drama practitioner You will be required to explore scripted works taking on different roles and characters you will learn how to work as part of a company and rehearse effectively
Through the performance elements of the course you will develop your confidence and self-esteem as well as your
independence and ability to reflect as a performer Through devising you will explore your ability to think creatively and problem solve working both independently and as part of a group You will have the opportunity to develop
theatre works that explore your own interests and ideas including preparing audition work This qualification is aimed at preparing students for industry andor further studies in drama the performing arts
or physical vocations It also leads to a range of transferrable skills such as teamwork problem solving and oracy
that all employers and higher education institutes look for Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 Building skill and understanding of contrasting techniques
Term 2 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 1
Term 3 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 2
Year 11
Term 1 Developing Skills and Techniques in the Performing Arts Exploring the Performing Arts - work 3
Term 2 Performing to a Brief
Term 3 Performing to a Brief
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Assessment The course is divided into 3 units that interrelate to each other Acting Skills (Technique) Individual Showcase
(Devising and Performance) and Preparation Performance and Production (Devising and Performance) Acting Skills consists of a practical exam including students rehearsing and performing a scripted play as a class
alongside keeping a reflective logbook It is worth 50 of the final overall grade Individual Showcase consists of a practical exam of two audition pieces (students can create these or identify
existing monologues) and a one hour written exam discussing their audition works It is worth 25 of the final
overall grade Preparation Performance and Production is a practical exam involving students working in groups to develop their
own dramas work and performance alongside a reflective logbook It is worth 25 of the final overall grade
Enrichment Opportunities Students who take Drama are encouraged to take part in as many performance opportunities as possible They
can audition to be part of the whole school show and participate in the Drama club Students can use the drama studio for rehearsals during break lunch and after school times Students have the opportunity to perform their
work at school events and as part of the wider school eg assemblies end of term celebrations and other external
events There are a range of theatre visits and trips throughout the year and students will take part in workshops from a range of external providers New links and partnerships are currently in development with South Hill Park
to further expand the range of opportunities available within the drama department
Mrs C Duffy Head of Performing Arts
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
RELIGIOUS STUDIES GCSE (Eduqas)
Why study GCSE RS Studying RS at GCSE will enable you to
Develop your understanding of a variety of religious non-religious and philosophical views
Consider different philosophical and ethical arguments
Understand how beliefs philosophy and ethics impact on a personrsquos life
Gain MANY transferable skills which you can apply to all your subjects
Learn and develop the ability to debate
Course Content
Year 10
Term 1 a) Buddhism - Beliefs b) Issues of Human Rights
Term 2 a) Christianity - Beliefs
b) Christianity - Practices
Term 3 a) Issues of Life and Life After Death
Year 11
Term 1 a) Issues of Relationships
b) Buddhism - Practices
Term 2 a) Issues of Good and Evil b) Revision
Term 3 a) Revision
Assessment
Students take three exams ndash
Component 1 - Philosophy ndash one two-hour paper - 50 of final grad
Students study four themes relationship
life and death good and evil
human rights Component 2 - Christianity belief and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Component 3 - Buddhism beliefs and practices - one hour paper - 25 of final grade
Enrichment Opportunities
As well as being a recognised academic GCSE Religious Studies helps contribute towards literacy skills debating and critical thinking It is favoured by many universities and employers particularly those professions which deal
with people police social services law and medicine
Mr S Vegh Head of Religious Studies
Green Blue Yellow Purple
Brakenhale School
Key Stage 4 Curriculum Options 2020-22
Brakenhale School
Rectory Lane Bracknell Berkshire RG12 7BA
Tel 01344 423 041
Fax 0843 290 5662
Email mainreceptionbrakenhalecouk
Web wwwbrakenhalecouk
January 2020
top related